JP2020068816A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine in which a game can be played includes: a first movable body that is operatively provided; a second movable body that is operatively provided at a position different from the first movable body; and display means. The display means can display a first character and a second character, displays the first character when the first movable body is operated, displays the second character when the second movable body is operated, and displays the first character and the second character when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-12

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine, there is one that can operate an accessory that is a decorative body and displays an effect image according to the operation of the accessory on a liquid crystal display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-92893, A

  However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem in that the effect of rendering cannot be enhanced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing a staging effect.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first movable body (for example, movable body 042SG302L) operably provided;
A second movable body (for example, movable body 042SG302R) operably provided at a position different from the first movable body,
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
Equipped with
The display means is
A first character (for example, image 042SG5x shown in FIG. 11-12) and a second character (for example, image 042SG5y shown in FIG. 11-12) can be displayed.
The first character is displayed when the first movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, when only the movable body 042SG302L moves toward the effect position, the image display device 5 is displayed). Image 042SG5x is displayed),
The second character is displayed when the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position, the image display device 5 is displayed). Image 042SG5y is displayed),
The first character and the second character are displayed when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R). (Where 0 and SG move toward the effect position, images 042SG5x and 042SG5y are displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result being derived and displayed,
The display means is
It is possible to display a highlighting that emphasizes that the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, highlighting of a decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times in the image display device 5). part),
The highlighted display can be displayed in different modes depending on whether the first movable body is operated or the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L). Only when moving only toward the effect position and when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position, a portion for executing the highlighting of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 a plurality of times)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of being controlled in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1 or 2,
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with a third movable body (for example, movable body 042SG401) that can be operated separately,
The third movable body operates after the first movable body and the second movable body operate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R move to the effect position. (The part where the movable body 042SG401 falls after doing)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect produced by the third movable body can be enhanced.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The first movable body and the second movable body,
It is movable between a first position (for example, a standby position that is on the left and right sides of the image display device 5) and a second position (for example, a presentation position that is in front of the image display device 5),
The first movable body moves to a third position, which is between the first position and the second position when the first character is displayed on the display means (see, for example, FIG. 11-12). As described above, the movable body 042SG302L moves to the preparation position between the standby position and the presentation position and temporarily stops when the image 042SG5x is displayed on the image display device 5),
The second movable body moves to the third position when the second character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302R displays an image on the image display device 5). When 042SG5y is displayed, it moves to the preparation position between the standby position and the effect position and temporarily stops)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably move the first movable body and the second movable body.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
Based on the fact that the movement of the player is detected by the detection means for a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B), the first movable body and the second movable body are separated from each other. Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, movable object effect shown in FIG. 10-30 and FIG. 10-31 in the characteristic section 177SG) to be operated in conjunction with the player's operation (for example, effect in the characteristic section 177SG. A portion in which the control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 11-24),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
When the movement of the player is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first operation mode (for example, the characteristic portion). As shown in FIG. 11-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. Therefore, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated at high speed and low torque),
When the player's motion is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are set to the second operation mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic part 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in the state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. Is operated in the torque priority mode to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a low speed).
According to this feature, the effect of production can be improved.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
A predetermined state (for example, a state where a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed or a state where an error is detected. A predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( (Time saving state), high-probability low base state (latent state), high-probability high base state (probability change state), or state controlled to a specific effect mode) For example, in the effect control CPU 120, a part that controls to execute the super reach effect by executing step S172, or a part that detects an error in the game control microcomputer 100. A part of the microcomputer 100 that controls a predetermined game state, and a part of the effect control CPU 120 that controls a predetermined effect mode. And a there may be) a part that executes a predetermined effect,
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, super reach effect) (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172);
Display control means capable of displaying a related display (e.g., telop display) related to the predetermined state on the display means (e.g., a part of CPU 120 for effect control that performs the first telop effect by performing step S172); And a part for performing a second telop effect when a command indicating that an error is detected is received in S75),
The display control means,
While executing the special effect, it is possible to display the related display in a predetermined mode accompanied by a motion (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed),
In accordance with the change of the special effect mode, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to a special mode in which the operation speed is different from the predetermined mode (for example, the second stage in which characters move at high speed, the characters move at low speed). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172 so that in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing the cut-in display), the effect is controlled in the first step. 1 telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the second stage in the latter half of the super reach effect (after the cut-in display is performed), and the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in the third stage immediately before fluctuation stop. Perform (see FIG. 8-1 of the characteristic part 38SG))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of production can be improved.

  Note that the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is equipped. It is a figure which shows the structure of an image display apparatus, the display state in an image display apparatus, and the visual recognition state of the stereo image with both eyes of a player. (A)-(H) is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation of movable body production. (A) and (B) are figures which show the detail of the example of a production | operation effect | action of 1st movable body production, (C) is a figure which shows an image display example. It is a figure which shows a modification. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which were mounted in the game machine which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a front view showing a state where the movable body of the effect device relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG is in the first position, and (B) is a state where the movable body of the effect device relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG is in the second position. Is. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the effect device according to the characteristic portion of 177SG is viewed from diagonally front. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the effect device according to the characteristic portion of 177SG is viewed obliquely from behind. It is an exploded perspective view showing the state where the structure of the movable body concerning the characteristic portion of 177SG was seen from diagonally front. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the movable body according to the characteristic portion of 177SG is viewed from diagonally behind. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the rotating portion related to the characteristic portion of 177SG is in the first protruding position, and (B) is a state in which the rotating portion related to the characteristic portion of 177SG is in the accommodation position. It is a principal part fracture | rupture sectional view which shows the structure of the lower part of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the first drive mechanism relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG, and (B) is a plan view showing the guided member relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG. FIG. 17 is a plan view showing the relationship between the guide groove, the guided member, and the moving body according to the characteristic portion of 177SG. (A)-(E) is a figure which shows the operation mode of the to-be-guided member and movable part which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (F)-(J) is a figure which shows the operation mode of the to-be-guided member and movable part which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(C) is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, and an image display apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a movable body related to a characteristic part of 177SG is in a lowered position, and (B) is a state in which it is in a raised position related to a characteristic part of 177SG. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the effect control command which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot classification determination table which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various jackpots which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the non-detection time operation control, the detection time operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation speed and the accessory motor drive mode in the operation | movement of the non-detection time operation control, the detection time operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during change display concerning a characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production goods operation processing concerning the feature part of 177SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production effect goods storage processing concerning the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the accessory motor drive mode which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the super-reach classification, button control, and accessory motor drive mode which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A), (B) is a timing chart which shows the button operation and the accessory motor which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation aspect of the movable body in the super reach C which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation aspect of the movable body in the super reach D which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in a characteristic unit 042SG. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a standby position of each movable body, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing an effect position of each movable body. It is an exploded perspective view of a first effect device, a second effect device, and a third effect device. It is a cross-sectional view of a first effect device, a second effect device, and a third effect device. It is a front view of a second effect device. It is a rear view showing the operation of the movable body in the third effect device. It is a rear view showing the operation of the movable body in the third effect device. (A) is a figure which illustrates a production control command, (B) is a relation diagram of the production performed during each reach production, and (C) is an explanatory view of the interlocking production and the combined production. It is a figure showing the production mode of interlocking production. It is the figure which shows the production aspect of united production. It is the figure which shows the production aspect of information production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (a symbol deviating from the symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "deleting the symbol". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (disappearing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "disappear".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset. It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach out") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach out"). In addition, when the display result is “out”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach out” is displayed). (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “out of reach”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a falling symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Further, when the display result is “out”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "off", the gaming state is updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is controlled, and when the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command for designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “out”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 115IW)
Next, the characteristic unit 115IW of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 115IW is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, can be controlled in a predetermined state, can perform a special effect, and displays a related display related to the predetermined state on the display means. It is possible. Further, during execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode accompanied by an operation, and the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special effect mode in accordance with the change of the special effect mode. It is configured so that it can be changed to a mode (a special mode in which the operation speed is different from the predetermined mode).

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 115IW can execute a telop effect in which a telop is displayed on the image display device 5 as a related display. As the telop effect, a first telop effect that displays a first telop effect related to the effect state (specifically, a character that suggests that super reach is in progress) and a second telop effect related to the gaming state (specifically Secondly, a second telop effect that displays a character indicating that an error has been detected is provided.

  While the characters of the first telop display are moved and displayed in the first telop effect, the characters of the second telop display are fixedly displayed in the second telop effect.

  Further, as the stage of the character moving speed in the first telop effect, there are provided a first stage in which the character moves at a medium speed, a second stage in which the character moves at a high speed, and a third stage in which the character moves at a low speed. Has been. Specifically, when the first telop presentation is performed, the first telop display is displayed in the first stage in the first half of the super reach production, and the first telop display is displayed in the second stage in the second half of the super reach production. The first telop display is displayed in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation is stopped. As described above, during the execution of the super reach effect, the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display is switched step by step from middle speed → high speed → low speed.

  8-1 to 8-4 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples on the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 115IW.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-1, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern which develops into a super reach and becomes a big hit in step S111, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern in step S172. It is realized by performing a variable effect.

  For example, first, when the variation is performed and the same symbol is stopped and displayed as the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol, the reach is developed (see FIG. 8-1 (1)), and when the super reach is developed, the image display device 5 is displayed. The first telop display 115IW10 indicating that the super reach is being performed is displayed at the lower left and upper right of (see FIG. 8-1 (2)). At this time, in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed in the lower left of the image display device 5, the characters move from the upper left to the lower right, while in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed in the upper right of the image display device 5, the lower right. The characters are displayed as if moving from left to right. The moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 at this time is the first stage. Further, since the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5 displays larger characters than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5, the image display device is displayed. The first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the lower left of 5 is closer to the front side (player side) than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5.

  Note that in FIG. 8-1, two first telop displays 115IW10 are displayed, but a single first telop display 115IW10 or three or more first telop displays 115IW10 may be displayed.

  Further, when a plurality of first telop displays 115IW10 are displayed, the display modes such as the size of the characters and the display range, and the moving direction and moving speed of the characters may be unified or may be the same. It may be different. Further, the content of the characters may be the same or different. For example, one of the telop displays may display "SP reach in progress!", And the other telop display may display "SP winch if teammate character wins !?". Further, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the display mode of the telop and the content of the characters.

  Next, the cut-in display is performed at a predetermined timing during the super reach (see FIG. 8-1 (3)), and the first telop display 115IW10 is once erased. When the cut-in display ends, the display corresponding to the super reach and the first telop display 115IW10 are displayed again on the image display device 5 (see (4) in FIG. 8-1). At this time, the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second stage. As described above, in the present example, the movement speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched when the cut-in display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the moving speed of the characters may be switched from the first stage to the second stage without interrupting the display of the first telop display 115IW10.

  Then, at the stage of reaching the end of super reach, the display in the super reach production (display in which the sword and the ax collide) is displayed in slow motion (or the stop display), and the moving speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is It switches to the third stage (see FIG. 8-1 (5)). The first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed at a speed slower than the second stage, and for example, the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed in the first stage.

  Finally, the super reach effect is finished and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-1 (6)). Although an example of a big hit is shown here, it may occur after the display shown in FIG. 8-1 (5). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (5), after the display in the super reach effect is displayed in slow motion and the moving speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the third stage, further in the super reach effect. The characters on the display and the first telop display 115IW10 may be stopped and displayed, and whether or not the jackpot is a big hit may be notified based on a predetermined operation by the player (for example, pressing the push button 31B).

  The first telop display 115IW10 has been described as having characters displayed on a non-transparent background, but the background may be transparent.

  Further, in the present feature section 115IW, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched corresponding to the display of the super reach effect, but the first telop display is performed corresponding to the effects other than the super reach effect. The mode (moving speed of characters) in the 115IW10 may be switched. For example, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched corresponding to the effect using the effect members other than the image display device 5 such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the movable body 32. Specifically, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched according to the tempo or volume of the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the mode may be changed from the retracted position to the first position. If the movable body 32 that can move to the first advance position and the second advance position is provided, the moving speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is located at the retracted position. Is set to the first step, and the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second step based on the movement to the first advance position, and the first telop is displayed based on the fact that the character is moved to the second advance position. The moving speed of characters on display 115IW10 may be switched to the third stage.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-2, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern which develops into a super reach and becomes a big hit in step S111, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern in step S172. It is realized by performing the second telop effect when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command indicating that an error is detected in step S75, in addition to performing the variable effect. Detailed description of the same parts as in FIG. 8A is omitted.

  For example, as shown in (2), (4), and (5) of FIG. 8-2, in the first telop display 115IW10, while the speed of the character changes according to the change in the development mode of the super reach effect, The 2-telop display 115IW20 is fixedly displayed without being affected by the change in the development mode of the super reach effect.

  It should be noted that here, the abnormal winning (the count switch 23 is turned on even though the special winning opening is closed, and the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on even though the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Error such as being turned on), abnormal electromagnetic detection, opening of door provided in game frame, hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) being full, etc. ..

  In FIG. 8-2, the second telop display 115IW20 is continuously displayed from the start to the end of the change, but a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display, Alternatively, the second telop display 115IW20 is deleted based on the detection of a specific operation during the display of the second telop display 115IW20.

  Further, although the second telop display 115IW20 has been described as having characters displayed on a non-transparent background, the background may be transparent.

  The display example shown in FIG. 8-3 is realized by the effect control CPU 120 performing an image blur effect in which a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 are collectively vibrated in step S172.

  For example, in super reach, the image blurring effect is executed from the state where the first telop display 115IW10 and the second telop display 115IW20 are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-3 (1)). 8-3 (2)). Specifically, a plurality of displays such as the character image and the first telop display 115IW10 are reduced at a common reduction rate. By executing the reduction effect, a black display area outside area 115IW30 is formed around the changed display. At this time, the second telop display 115IW20 is not changed from the position shown in FIG. 8-3 (1), but is displayed across the changed display and the non-display area 115IW30, as shown in the figure. , The characters of the second telop display 115IW20 are recognizable.

  Further, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are continuously moved and displayed even while the image blurring effect is being performed. During execution of the image blur effect, the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may change (for example, change from the first stage to the second stage) according to the degree of development of the super reach effect, or the reduced display. Since it is difficult to recognize the change in speed due to, the aspect of the first telop display 115IW10 may not change even if the super reach effect is developed during the execution of the image blur effect.

  Note that the image blurring effect is not an effect that is performed in all variations, and for example, a variation in which the image blurring effect is executed is more likely to be a big hit than a variation in which the image blurring effect is not executed ( That is, the image blurring effect is executed as the chance-up effect). Specifically, the image blurring effect is executed at a higher rate in the case of the big hit variation than in the case of the outlying variation.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), the effect control CPU 120 receives a command indicating that the game state is the specific game state in step S75, and thus the game ball to the right side area of the game board 2 is displayed. This is realized by displaying a right-handed display 115IW40 that prompts the player to launch (so-called right-handed).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in an area partially overlapping with the display area of the right-handed display 115IW40 by developing into a super reach in a specific game state. Is displayed. At this time, the display priority of the right-handed display 115IW40 is higher than the display priority of the first telop display 115IW10. However, since the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed, the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed. The player can recognize the suggestion content of.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (2), in the gaming machine provided with the movable body 115IW50 that can be operated, the effect control CPU 120 performs the accessory production in which the movable body 115IW50 is driven to the advanced position in step S172. It is realized by this.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (2), the effect production is performed during the super reach, so that the movable body 115IW50 and the display area of the first telop display 115IW10 overlap. At this time, the movable body 115IW50 is on the front side (player side) of the first telop display 115IW10, but the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed, so that the suggested contents of the first telop display 115IW10 are displayed. It can be recognized by the player.

  The display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (3) is a gaming machine equipped with the image display device 5 and a sub-image display device 115IW60 different from the image display device 5, and is displayed by the production control CPU 120 in step S172. This is realized by performing the variation effect according to the reach variation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (3), the first telop display 115IW10 extends across the image display device 9 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 9. It is supposed to be displayed. The sub-image display device 115IW60 is composed of, for example, an LCD or an organic EL, and displays various effect images. The sub image display device 115IW60 may include a projector and a screen.

  The sub image display device 115IW60 may be operable. For example, the display is normally performed at a retracted position that is not in contact with the image display device 9, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a specific variation pattern is selected, a player's action is detected). Based on this, the first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the image display device 5 may be extended and displayed by advancing to a position adjacent to the image display device 9.

  As described above, according to the feature unit 115IW, the game machine capable of executing a game is in a predetermined state (in the present example, a predetermined performance (super reach performance) is being executed, or an error occurs. Predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (time saving state), high probability low base state (latent state), high probability high base state (probability variation state) )), Or may be in a state of being controlled to a specific effect mode), a state of detecting an error, a state of being controlled to a specific effect mode) (in this example, The effect control CPU 120 controls to a state in which the super reach effect is being executed by executing step S172. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 detects an error. The black computer 100 may control a predetermined game state, the effect control CPU 120 may control a predetermined effect mode, or may execute a predetermined effect), and a special effect (super reach effect in this example). Execution is possible (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach effect by performing step S172), and a related display (in this example, telop display) related to a predetermined state is displayed on the display unit (in this example). Can be displayed on the image display device 5 (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first telop effect by performing step S172, and receives a command indicating that an error has been detected in step S75. If the second telop effect is performed).

  Although it has been stated that the special reach 115IW can execute the super reach effect as a special effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notice effect such as a character notice, a group notice, or a character effect, or not yet started. A pre-reading announcement effect whose change is subject to an announcement may be executable as a special effect.

  Further, the “related display related to the predetermined state” is a display related to the current control in the predetermined state (for example, a display such as “SP reach” or “error occurring”), and a predetermined display in the future. It is a concept including a display related to the possibility of being controlled by the state (for example, a display such as “preparing” that indicates that a specific effect is scheduled to be executed).

  Further, as described above, during execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode (in the present example, the first stage in which characters move at medium speed) accompanied by an operation, and the special effect can be displayed. In accordance with the change of the mode, the mode of the related display is changed from the predetermined mode to the special mode (in the present example, the second stage in which characters move at high speed, the third stage in which characters move at low speed). It is possible to change (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172 to display the first telop in the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect (before the cut-in display is performed). 115IW10 is performed, and in the second half of the super reach effect (after the cut-in display is performed), the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage, and immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first telop display 11 is performed in the third stage. IW10 perform (see Figure 8-1)) was decided. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, during execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode (in the present example, the first stage in which characters move at medium speed) accompanied by an operation, and the special effect can be displayed. In accordance with the change of the mode, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special mode in which the operation speed is different from the predetermined mode (in this example, the character moves at high speed in the second stage, and the character moves at low speed in the third stage) Can be changed to (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that in the first half of the super reach effect (before the cut-in display is performed), the first telop is set in the first stage. Display 115IW10, and in the latter half of the super reach effect (after the cut-in display is performed), the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage, and immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first telop display is performed in the third stage. The 15IW10 performed (see Figure 8-1)) can be characterized. With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the characteristic part 115IW, the first telop display 115IW10 should be displayed in the first stage in the first half of the super reach production, in the second stage in the latter half of the super reach production, and in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop (medium speed → However, the present invention is not limited to this as long as it changes according to the change of the mode of the effect. For example, it may switch from low speed → medium speed → high speed, or may switch from high speed → medium speed → low speed.

  The mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched only once or may be switched three times or more. Further, the stage of the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched to the same stage multiple times, such as medium speed → high speed → low speed → high speed.

  In addition, in the stage of the telop display mode, the moving speed of characters is constant (medium speed in the first stage, high speed in the second stage, low speed in the third stage). However, for example, there may be provided a step in which the moving speed of the character is increased or decreased every predetermined cycle.

  In addition, the special mode having an operation speed different from the predetermined mode is a concept including a mode that is faster and a mode that is lower than the predetermined mode. Further, the low-speed mode is a concept that includes those displayed slowly compared to the medium-speed mode and the high-speed mode, as well as those that are fixedly displayed (stopped) and those that are substantially stopped. For example, by switching from the stage where the text of the telop display is displayed to the stage where the text is fixedly displayed, or by switching from the stage where the text of the telop display is statically displayed to the stage where the text is moved and displayed. The mode may be changed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 115IW, the telop display in which characters are moved and displayed is displayed as the mode accompanied by the operation, but the specific example of the operation is not limited to this. For example, a character that does not move, but an effect image surrounding the character is moved and displayed, a character or effect image blinks, or the size, brightness, color, or transparency of the character or effect image changes. It may be. Further, the color or transparency of the background portion of the character may be changed.

  In addition, the "special aspect linked with the aspect of the special effect" means an aspect associated with the progress of the special effect as in the feature part 115IW (for example, if the first half of the reach is the first stage, the second half of the reach. For example, the second stage, the third stage immediately before the stop of the fluctuation) and the mode (for example, a mode that changes according to the switching frequency of the display image and the tempo of the music) in conjunction with the size of the effect of the special effect. It is a concept.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the final stage of the super reach effect (see FIG. 8-1 (5)), the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 shake in accordance with the impact of the sword and ax colliding. Alternatively, the characters on the first telop display 115IW10 may be moved in a direction different from the moving direction, so that the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed in a manner linked to the effect contents.

  At that time, a plurality of types of impact magnitudes (for example, impact (large) and impact (small)) in which the sword and the ax collide are provided, and the first telop display 115IW10 is provided according to the magnitude of the impact. The magnitude of the influence on (for example, the swing width of the character) may be different.

  Further, even if the same kind of impact is applied, the magnitude of the influence (for example, the swing width of the character) on the first telop display 115IW10 may be different based on whether or not it is a big hit. As a result, the first telop display 115IW10 can be focused more, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, even if the same kind of impact is applied, the impact of the impact on the first telop display displayed on the lower left of the image display device 5 and on the first telop display displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 is great. The height (for example, the swing width of a character) may be different. For example, in a gaming machine that displays a large telop display with a large character and a small telop display with a small character in parallel, such as the main characterizing portion 115IW, an effect in which a sword and an ax collide with each other with a predetermined impact was performed. In this case, if the characters swayed by the same width between the large telop display and the small telop display, the ratio of the swaying width to the character size of the small telop display is larger than the ratio of the swaying width to the character size of the large telop display. Therefore, the influence on the small telop display appears to be relatively larger than the influence on the large telop display, which may give an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, in the case where a sword and an ax collide with each other due to a predetermined impact, the width of the characters displayed in the large telop is larger than the width of the characters displayed in the small telop (for example, the large telop is displayed). If the ratio of the character size of the small telop display to the size of the displayed character is the same as the ratio of the sway width of the character of the small telop display to the sway width of the character of the large telop display), the large telop display is displayed. And the effect on the small telop display are relatively equal to each other, so that it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in the feature unit 115IW, as a related display, a first related display that changes from a predetermined mode to a special mode according to a change in the special effect mode (in this example, a character display according to the progress of the super reach effect). The first telop display 115IW10 in which the speed level changes, and the second related display in which the mode does not change according to the change in the mode of the special effect (in this example, the mode is constant regardless of the progress of the super reach effect). The second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the characteristic part 115IW, the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 are not displayed with motion, but the display is not limited to this, and display with motion (such as moving display of characters and effect images, Characters or effect images may blink, or the size, brightness, color, or transparency may be changed). Also in that case, the second telop display 115IW20 may be displayed in a certain mode without being affected by the change in the development mode of the super reach effect.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 115IW, a first related display related to the effect state (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10 indicating that the super reach effect is being executed) and a second related display related to the game state. (In this example, the second telop display 115IW20 indicating that an error is being detected) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  The "first related display related to the effect state" is a display indicating that a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed, a display indicating that a specific effect mode is being controlled, and a player. It may be a display for prompting the user to operate.

  The "second related display relating to the gaming state" means a display indicating that an error is occurring, a predetermined gaming state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (time saving state ), A high-probability low base state (latent state), a high-probability high base state (probability change state)), a display prompting the player how to hit (for example, a right-handed notification display) It may be.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 115IW, a predetermined effect (in this example, an image blurring effect in which a plurality of displays are collectively vibrated) can be executed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an image by performing step S172. It is possible to cause the display means to have an area outside the display area (in this example, the area 115IW30 outside the display area) appearing on the display means in response to the execution of the predetermined effect. The second related display can be displayed on the display, and the display content of the second related display can be recognized when the second related display is displayed so as to extend over the area outside the display area (in this example, the area outside the display area). The second telop display 115IW20 can be displayed so as to extend over the 115IW30, and at that time, the characters on the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized (see FIG. 8C)). It was. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 115IW, by displaying the character of “error is occurring” at a position that does not overlap with the outside display area 115IW30, the second telop display 115IW20 is displayed even when the image blurring effect is performed. Although it is configured so that the characters can be recognized, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, when the character “error is occurring” is displayed at a position overlapping the area 115IW30 outside the display area when the image blurring effect is performed, the character “error occurring” is not assimilated to the area 115IW30 outside the display area. As described above, the character color of “error occurring” may be different from the color of the area 115IW30 outside the display area (for example, if the area 115IW30 outside the display area is black, the character “error occurring” is displayed in white). By displaying a non-transparent background (inside the frame of the second telop display 115IW20) behind the "error is occurring" like the present characteristic portion 115IW, the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized. You may comprise.

  Further, when some characters of the telop display when the outside-display-area region 115IW30 is made to become difficult to be recognized by being assimilated to the outside-display-area region 115IW30, the characters of the telop display are displayed in the outside-display-area region. All characters in the non-display area 115IW30 may be made recognizable by moving to a position that is not assimilated to the 115IW30.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 115IW, the display means can display a related display and a specific display (in the present example, a right-handing notification display 115IW40 that urges a right-handing in a specific gaming state) (in the present example, staging. The control CPU 120 displays the right-hand strike notification display 115IW40 based on the reception of the command indicating that the game state is the specific game state in step S75), and also when the specific display is overlaid on the related display, The contents of the related display can be recognized (in this example, even when the right-handed notification display 115IW40 is displayed over the first telop display 115IW10, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized (FIG. 8). -4 (1))). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

  It should be noted that the characters are not limited to those that move as long as the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized even if the specific display is displayed.

  For example, when it is difficult to recognize or cannot recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10 from one character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information of “SP reach in progress!” On the first telop display 115IW10. However, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 may be made recognizable from a plurality of the same character information.

  In addition, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the right-handing notification display 115IW40 are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect control CPU 120 makes the volume of the SP reach-in-tune sound louder than the volume of the right-handing instruction voice, and the SP It is also possible to make it easier to perceptually recognize the music in reach and to be able to recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10.

  Further, the specific display that is overlapped and displayed on the first telop display 115IW10 is not limited to the right-handed notification display 115IW40. For example, even if another telop display (hereinafter, referred to as “third telop display”) is displayed as a specific display on the first telop display 115IW10, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized in the same manner. It may be done.

  Further, in the display in which the third telop display is overlapped with the first telop display 115IW10 as the specific display, the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may be different according to the content suggested by the third telop display.

  For example, when the content suggested by the third telop display is lower in attention than the content suggested by the first telop display 115IW10, the character moving speed of the first telop display 115IW10 is lower than that of the third telop display. On the other hand, when the content suggested by the first telop display 115IW10 is lower in attention than the content suggested by the third telop display, the moving speed of the characters of the third telop display is faster than that of the first telop display 115IW10. May be fast.

  In addition, for example, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the third telop display indicate the contents related to the same state (for example, the first telop display 115IW10 indicates that the prefetch notice effect is being executed, and the third telop display is When suggesting the contents of the prefetching notice effect), the moving speeds of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 and the characters in the third telop display may be similar.

  Further, when the state where the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the specific display is not displayed is changed to the state where the specific display is superimposed on the first telop display 115IW10, it is difficult to recognize due to the specific display. By displaying the content of the first telop display 115IW10 that has become a non-hidden position by the specific display (for example, a new telop display is displayed at another position or a balloon display), the first telop display is displayed. The contents of the 115IW10 may be made recognizable.

  Further, the present characteristic portion 115IW includes an operable movable body (in this example, the movable body 115IW50), the display means can display the related display in a predetermined display area, and the movable body can display at least the predetermined display. The content of the related display can be recognized even when the movable body can be operated in the operation position overlapping the area and the movable body is in the operation position during the display of the related display (in the present example, the display of the first telop display 115IW10). Even when the movable body 115IW50 is moved to a position overlapping the area, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized (see FIG. 8-4 (2)). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

  It should be noted that the characters are not limited to those that move as long as the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized even when the movable body advances.

  For example, when it is difficult to recognize or cannot recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10 from one character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information of “SP reach in progress!” On the first telop display 115IW10. However, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 may be made recognizable from a plurality of the same character information.

  Further, when the display area of the first telop display 115IW10 and the position of the movable body 115IW50 overlap, the effect control CPU 120 performs SP reach during the sound volume corresponding to the operation of the movable body 115IW50. For example, the volume of the music may be increased so that the music in the SP reach can be easily recognized auditorily, and the content of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized.

  Further, it is possible to display a telop display A that may be difficult to see due to the operation of the movable body 115IW50 and a telop display B that does not become difficult to see due to the operation of the movable body 115IW50. Even when the telop display B is not recognizable, the movable body 115IW50 does not overlap the telop display B, and thus the content of the telop display B may be recognizable. Note that the telop display A and the telop display B may have the same or different suggestive contents.

  When the movable body 115IW50 is moved to the advanced position from the state in which the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the movable body 115IW50 is located in the retracted position (the state in which the first telop display 115IW10 is visible) , The content of the first telop display 115IW10 that is difficult to recognize by the movable body 115IW50 is displayed at a position not hidden by the movable body 115IW50 (for example, a new telop display is displayed at another position or a balloon display is performed). By doing so, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 may be made recognizable.

  Further, the present characteristic portion 115IW includes, as display means, a first display means (image display device 5 in this example) and a second display means (sub image display device 115IW60 in this example), and the first display means And the related display can be displayed across the second display means (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10 can be displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 (FIG. 8-4). (See (3))). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

  As the second display means, a dot matrix LED display device (a dot matrix type display in which LEDs are arranged in a two-dimensional array) or a versa writer (a plurality of LEDs arranged on the long side surface of the plate body is short according to a specific pattern) A display device may be provided for displaying various effect images by utilizing the afterimage of the light of the LED generated by rotating the plate while blinking at regular intervals.

  Further, when the related display is displayed over the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, a non-display region (for example, between the display region of the image display device 5 and the display region of the sub-image display device 115IW60 (for example, By making it possible to display a character larger than the size of the image display device 5 and the frame portion of the sub-image display device 115IW60, it is possible to prevent the character of the related display from being difficult or unrecognizable due to the non-display area. Good.

  Further, when the telop display is displayed over the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, the telop display characters are displayed only on one of the display devices (for the display area of the telop display, Although it is provided across the sub-image display device 115IW60, the text information of the telop display may be displayed on only one display device).

  Also, a telop display A that displays characters across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, and a telop display B that displays characters across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60. It is possible to display, and the size of the characters displayed in the telop display A and the telop display B may be different. For example, the size of the telop display character displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 115IW60 is larger than the size of the telop display character displayed on only one of the display devices. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the overall appearance from being awkward.

  Further, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 are not limited to be adjacent to each other in the left and right direction, but may be adjacent to each other in the up and down direction.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 115IW, a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means is executed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the image blur effect by performing step S172). ), The display means, as the related display, a first specific related display (first telop display 115IW10 in this example) that receives a change due to the specific effect, and a second specific related display (in this example, a change not caused by the specific effect). , Second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2)). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

  Further, the specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays is not limited to an image blurring effect in which a plurality of displays are collectively vibrated, and, for example, a reduction effect of reducing and displaying a plurality of displays or an enlargement of a plurality of displays. It is also possible that the enlargement effect to be displayed is executed and the first telop display 115IW10 is changed by the reduction effect or the enlargement effect, while the second telop display 115IW20 is not changed by the reduction effect or the enlargement effect.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 115IW, a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means is executed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the image blur effect by performing step S172). ), The display means can display the related display in a mode involving an action, and the related display can be displayed in a mode involving a motion even when the related display changes due to the execution of the specific effect (in this example, Even when the image blurring effect is performed, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2))). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

  Also, the characters displayed in the telop display are not limited to those that are linearly moved and displayed, and those that are displayed in a circularly formed area and those that are displayed in a zigzag formed area are displayed. , A region extending in the horizontal direction (strictly speaking, a region depicted on a plane that appears to extend in the horizontal direction (that is, a display screen of the image display device 5)) is moved and displayed so as to be seen three-dimensionally. May be.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK and the characteristic part 115IW)
The gaming machine may include both the characteristic unit 31AK and the characteristic unit 115IW described above. For example, the title display in the characteristic part 31AK is displayed as a related display in the characteristic part 115IW (the title display mode of the reach effect is changed from the first stage to the second stage according to the change of the reach effect mode). May be

  Further, for example, the title display of the first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in the characteristic part 31AK is set as the first related display in the characteristic part 115IW, and the second suggestive effect in the characteristic part 31AK (for example, super reach D or The title display of Super Reach E) may be the second related display in the characteristic portion 115IW (specifically, the mode of the title display of the first suggestive effect (for example, Super Reach A or Super Reach B) is Super Reach A or Super Reach). The title display mode of the second suggestive effect (for example, Super Reach D or Super Reach E) does not change according to the change of the modes of Super Reach D or Super Reach E.

  Further, for example, the expectation suggestion display in the characteristic part 31AK may be displayed as a related display in the characteristic part 115IW.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 38SH and the characteristic part 115IW)
A gaming machine may be provided with both the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 115IW described above. Here, the characteristic portion 38SH includes the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH), the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH), the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), and the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH). For example, the related display in the characteristic part 38SH and the related display in the characteristic part 115IW may be the same.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 005SG)
Next, the characteristic part 005SG will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic part 005SG is a first origin position that is the upper front side of the image display device 5 and a first origin position that is below the first origin position and in front of the display area 5E of the image display device 5. The first movable body 005SG301 that can move in the vertical direction between the advanced position, the second origin position that is the lower front side of the image display device 5, and the position directly above the second origin position and in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. And a second movable body 005SG401 that can move in the vertical direction between the second forward positions, which are forwards, and a stereoscopic image can be displayed on the image display device 5. The first movable body 005SG301 And the operation of the second movable body 005SG401 and the effect by displaying a stereoscopic image on the image display device 5 can be executed.

  The first movable body 005SG301 of the characteristic part 005SG includes a first movable portion 005SG301A slidably movable with respect to a base portion (not shown) provided on the first movable body 005SG301, and a first movable portion 005SG301A. And a second movable portion 005SG301B that is slidably provided.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a configuration of the image display device, a display state of the image display device, and a visual recognition state of a stereoscopic image by both eyes of a player. The image display device 5 in the feature section 005SG can display a 2D image and a 3D image. Next, a configuration for displaying a stereoscopically visible 3D image on the image display device 5 will be briefly described.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the image display device 5 includes an image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 that displays a 3D image that is a stereoscopic image (video) as a stereoscopically visible image, and from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900. A backlight 005SG901 that radiates planar light toward the front side, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 at a predetermined interval from the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 , An image display device including a parallax barrier type naked-eye stereoscopic liquid crystal display device. The image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols during the variable display period of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is a shutter that prevents the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 in the form of a vertically long strip and the left-eye image from the player's right eye. A parallax barrier that displays a parallax barrier image having a vertical striped black portion and a transparent portion that allows the right eye of the player to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the left eye of the player to visually recognize the image for the left eye. The liquid crystal panel has a relatively high light transparency, which enables an image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent portions without a vertical stripe black portion.

  That is, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 of the present characteristic part 005SG prevents the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right eye image and also includes the parallax barrier for preventing the player's right eye from visually recognizing the left eye image. Display and full-transmissive display in which the parallax barrier is not displayed are possible.

  In the characteristic part 005SG, the image display device 5 will be described by using an example in which a liquid crystal display device is used as the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a device of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900, a CRT ( It may be configured by a display device of another image display mode such as a Cathode Ray Tube), an FED (Field Emission Display), a PDP (Plasma Display Panel), a dot matrix LED, and an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel.

  Further, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is fixedly provided on the rear side of the game board 2 and at the arrangement position on the player's front side overlapping with the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900.

  The CPU 120 for effect control stores a CGROM (display control) that stores two-dimensional (2D) image data or stereoscopic (3D) image data for displaying a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye according to the received effect control command. A command for reading out necessary data from the unit 123) is output to the VDP (display control unit 123).

  In FIG. 9-1, the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 has a vertical band-shaped predetermined width that forms a stereoscopic image read from the image data ROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by VDP. The image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) are alternately displayed. In the present characteristic portion 005SG, the display widths of the right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) are made uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these display widths are set at the center of the screen. And the edge may be different.

  When the player's viewpoint position is at the reference position X0, D0, for example, an image corresponding to X0, D0 is displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 as shown in FIG. 9-1. For the right eye, each left-eye image (L) displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is hidden and blocked by the black band portion (shutter; also called a non-transmissive portion), and each right-eye image ( Since R) is visually recognized through the non-black band portion (blank; also referred to as a transparent portion), only the right-eye image (R) is provided to the right eye, while the left-eye image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is provided. The right-eye image (R) displayed on the screen is hidden and blocked by the black band (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive part), and the left-eye image (L) is displayed on the non-black band (blank; Also called a transparent part By seeing through the image, only the left-eye image (L) is provided to the left eye, so that the player views the stereoscopic image with the naked eye without wearing polarizing glasses or the like. be able to.

  In FIG. 9A, in order to facilitate understanding, the distance between the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 and the player's eyes is compared with the distance between the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. For convenience of illustration, since the length is shown to be significantly smaller than the actual length, the intersecting position where the line segments showing the lines of sight of the right eye and the left eye move to the front side or the rear side of the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. However, the actual amount of movement of these intersecting positions is very small.

  In the present characteristic part 005SG, stereoscopic vision in which depth is sensed is performed by utilizing the binocular parallax in the line-of-sight direction of the image seen by the right eye and the left eye. When the player visually recognizes the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 with both eyes, the right eye and the left eye have different visual line directions when observing an arbitrary part of the 3D image, and the visual line direction difference ( The depth can be sensed by the amount of parallax). The position where the line-of-sight directions intersect is called the vergence position, and the angle formed by the line-of-sight directions at this vergence position is called the vergence angle. If the angle of convergence is large, the player perceives the 3D image as being close to himself, and if the angle of convergence is small, the player perceives the 3D image as being far from himself. There is.

  In the present characteristic part 005SG, the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 in the first movable body effect (see FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B)) is displayed on the image display surface of the image display device 5 as described later. Also, the convergence position is set so as to be projected to the front side (the side closer to the player), but the convergence position A in which the apparent projection state of the 3D image is small and the apparent projection state of the effect image are A large convergence position B can be set, a distance corresponding to the rear part of the first movable body 005SG301, and a portion in which the 3D image appears at the convergence distance A far from the player and the first movable body 005SG301. A part corresponding to the front part, which looks like a 3D image at a convergence distance B close to the player, may be realized.

  As a result, in the first movable portion 005SG301A that is tilted forward in the proximity position, the rear portion close to the display area 5E and the front portion distant from the display area 5E have different apparent protrusions of the 3D image. You can Further, in addition to the above-mentioned convergence positions A and B, it is possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of convergence positions are set.

  In the characteristic portion 005SG, the effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (described later) and the fragment image 005SG006 (FIG. 9) not corresponding to the first movable body 005SG, which will be described later, are located at the convergence position B. -3 (B)) is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the effect image is set to the convergence position B, and the other parts are separated from the convergence position B. It may be set to the position. For example, in the effect image, only the portion in the vicinity of the periphery of the first movable body 005SG301 is set as the convergence position B, and the convergence position is set so that it appears to approach the player side as it moves away from the first movable body 005SG301. May be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the congestion position is set so that the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 can be seen to project toward the front side (the side closer to the player) with respect to the image display surface of the image display device 5. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the convergence position is set so that the effect image can be seen on the back side (the side far from the player) of the display surface of the image display device 5. You may set it.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, the effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the state where the convergence position B is set, and the convergence position B is the first movable position. By controlling the body 005SG301 so as to be within a predetermined range in the front-rear direction, the first movable body 005SG301 at the close position and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 can be integrally viewed. Therefore, it is possible to carry out a powerful production.

  Further, when the first movable body 005SG301 is located at a distant proximity position on the front side of the image display device 5, it is hidden by the first movable body 005SG301 in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, so that the player can see by both eyes. A region that cannot be visually recognized occurs, and a region that the player can visually recognize with one eye but cannot see with the other eye will occur. When a 3D image is displayed in such an area that can be visually recognized only by one eye, the 3D image may not be stereoscopically viewed, and the 3D image may be unclearly blurred. Therefore, the 3D image is not displayed (or is replaced with the 2D image and displayed) in the display area 5E near the periphery of the first movable body 005SG301, which is an area that can be visually recognized only by one eye, and is slightly away from the first movable body 005SG301. The 3D image may be displayed only in a display area that is distant and can be visually recognized by the player with both eyes. In particular, when the 3D image is a moving image and the 3D image moves together with the first movable body 005SG301, it is effective to display the 3D image only in the display area that the player can see with both eyes.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 005SG, an example in which a 3D image can be displayed in a first movable body effect described later is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body effect and other effects ( For example, a 3D image may be displayed in a notice effect, a big hit effect, or the like, or a decorative design may be displayed in a 3D image.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the stereoscopic image is displayed by the image display device including the parallax barrier type naked-eye stereoscopic display liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lenticular lens system is used. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image may be displayed using a naked-eye stereoscopic liquid crystal display device of the integral imaging type. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one for performing stereoscopic vision with the naked eye, and may be one for performing stereoscopic vision by wearing deflection glasses or the like.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, regardless of whether or not the first movable body 005SG301 operates, a 3D image corresponding to the first movable part 005SG301A is displayed at a predetermined timing in the development effect of the first movable body effect described later. An example in which a cutting edge image 005SG002 and an effect image 005SG003, which are 2D images corresponding to a certain effect image 005SG004 and the second movable portion 005SG301B, is displayed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 005SG301. May not operate for some reason, the above-mentioned blade edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, effect image 005SG004, etc. may not be displayed.

  Further, at the predetermined timing in the development effect, the effect image may be displayed as an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 together with an image simulating the first movable body 005SG301. Furthermore, such an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (an image simulating the first movable body 005SG301, an effect image, etc.) is always displayed in the first movable body 005SG301 even when the first movable body 005SG301 is operating normally. You may make it display on the area | region corresponding to the back side of the body 005SG301. By doing so, even if the first movable body 005SG301 does not operate for some reason, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and thus it is possible to avoid stopping the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

(Example of production operation of first movable body production and second movable body production)
Next, an example of the production operation of the first movable body production and the second movable body production will be described based on FIG. 9-2. FIGS. 9A to 9H are diagrams illustrating an example of a production operation of a movable body production. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing details of an example of a production operation of the first movable body production, and FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of image display.

  First, in the case of a variation pattern corresponding to super reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), and as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the variable display of the central decorative design display area 5C is continued to reach. As a mode, the normal reach effect is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), after the lost design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C, the variable display is restarted as shown in FIG. 9-2 (D). As a result, super reach production is started. After the execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (E), the lost design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C.

  When execution of the first movable body effect is determined as the development effect at the start of the variable display, the first movable object 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position to the first origin position as shown in FIGS. After moving to an intermediate position that is a position between the first origin position and the first advance position, a first proximity position that is behind the first advance position and is close to the display area 5E of the image display device 5 from the intermediate position. The second movable part 005SG301B is moved with respect to the first movable body 005SG301A according to the movement up to, and a cutting edge image or an effect image simulating the second movable part 005SG301B is displayed in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. The first movable body effect is executed. At this time, the first movable body 005SG301 changes (deforms) from the normal mode in which the second movable section 005SG301B projects so that it can be visually recognized by the player to the contracted mode stored in the first movable body 005SG301.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the first movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the intermediate position to the close position while moving from the normal mode to the contracted mode. By deforming the first movable body 005SG301, the first movable body 005SG301 moves rearward and downward from the front intermediate position to approach the central decorative pattern display area 5C that is the substantially central position of the rear display area E.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 slightly enlarges and displays the design image 005SG001 of the decorative design (the design of “6”) displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C in accordance with the above operation, and also the second movable unit. A cutting edge image 005SG002 simulating 005SG301B is displayed so that the design image 005SG001 is seen through. As described above, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the symbol image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 contracts. The blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B that can recognize the normal state before being transformed into the first movable portion 005SG301A is located in the display area 5E where the second movable portion 005SG301B is located. By displaying the pattern images 005SG001 in a see-through manner so as to be concatenated to the lower part of the display, the second movable portion 005SG301B can be seen three-dimensionally as if it were located at the back side through the display area 5E. It is possible to recognize the sword, which is one object. That is, the first movable portion 005SG301A, which is an object, and the cutting edge image 005SG002, which is a display image, make it possible to recognize an object in the normal state (first movable body 005SG301) before being transformed into the contracted state.

  Further, the first movable body 005SG301 has a forward tilted posture at the close position, and the blade edge image 005SG002 is tapered toward the rear which is visible when the second movable portion 005SG301B is located at the protruding position. By doing so, the blade edge pierces a position corresponding to the boundary between the first movable portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion 005SG301B in the pattern image 005SG001, and it is as if the second movable portion 005SG301B penetrates the display area 5E and is located on the back side. You can make it look three-dimensional.

  Further, an effect image 005SG003 for highlighting the blade edge image 005SG002 is displayed around the blade edge image 005SG002 in the display area 5E, and a first movable portion 005SG301A is arranged around the first movable portion 005SG301A in the display area 5E. The effect image 005SG004 for highlighting is displayed. These effect images 005SG003, 005SG004 are images of the same type that imitate a flame although the aspect is different, and are displayed so as to surround them at positions corresponding to the periphery of the first movable portion 005SG301A and the cutting edge image 005SG002. , The first movable portion 005SG301A and the blade edge image 005SG002 make it possible to recognize one object more strongly.

  Further, by displaying the cracked image 005SG005 on the design image 005SG001, it is possible to make the design image 005SG001 appear to be about to be destroyed by the cutting edge being pierced. Furthermore, after the cracked image 005SG005 is gradually enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the design image 005SG001 is deleted, and the plurality of pieces of the design image 005SG006 are destroyed by destroying the design pattern. Display an image that appears to be scattered around. Further, by displaying the effect image 005SG007 that emphasizes that the decorative pattern is destroyed, it is possible to strongly recognize that the decorative pattern is destroyed and the variable display is restarted.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a part of the images (effect image 005SG004 and fragment image 005SG006 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A) as a stereoscopic 3D image, Other images (design image 005SG001, cutting edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, crack image 005SG005) can be displayed as a 2D image.

  By doing so, it is possible to realize a stereoscopic effect for the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 which are desired to be displayed on the front side of the display area 5E. In particular, for the effect image 005SG004, the effect is placed near the first movable portion 005SG301A which is actually on the front side of the display area 5E, that is, at the position distant from the display area 5E on the front side similarly to the first movable portion 005SG301A. The image 005SG004 can appear to be displayed.

  On the other hand, by displaying the other pattern image 005SG001, the cutting edge image 005SG002, the effect image 005SG003, and the cracked image 005SG005 as a 2D image, the pattern image 005SG001, the effect image 005SG003, and the cracked image 005SG005 are located in the display area 5E, and the cutting edge is positioned. Since the image 005SG002 can be made to appear to be located farther back than the display area 5E, a sense of depth can be generated.

  In the characteristic part 005SG, as shown in FIG. 9C, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is a 3D image, and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 is a 2D image. Although the display control based on the display pattern A (the display pattern A shown in FIG. 9C) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body is not limited to the display pattern B. The effect image 005SG004 corresponding to 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 are both displayed as a 3D image, or the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed as a 2D image like the display pattern C. While doing The effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the leading image 005SG002 is displayed as a 3D image, or both the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 are 2D images like the display pattern D. May be displayed at.

  The display patterns A to D may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. For example, the display pattern A, the display pattern B, the display pattern C, and the display pattern The reliability may be set to increase in the order of D.

  Returning to FIG. 9-2 (E), when the lost design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C, when the second movable body effect of the effect pattern B is determined as the development effect type, As shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the first movable body 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position to the first advance position, and the second movable body 005SG401 is moved from the second origin position to the second advance position. At the same time, the second movable body effect of displaying the effect image in the display area 5E of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Although not shown in detail in detail, after performing the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect, the reach effect of the super reach (a weak super reach with a low expectation of a big hit or a strong super reach with a high expectation of a big hit). Reach effect) is performed, and in the case of a big hit, after the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed, the big hit effect is executed in response to the start of the big hit game state. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the combination of the lost symbols is stopped and displayed, and when the pending storage is 1 or more, the next variable display is started.

  Although the feature section 005SG exemplifies a form in which the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect can be executed during the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable object effect and the second movable object effect can be performed during the variable display. The ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different when the 1 movable object effect is executed and when the 2nd movable object effect is executed. In addition, depending on whether the first movable body effect is executed during the variable display and the second movable body effect is executed, the ratio of the reach effect of the weak super reach to be subsequently executed and the strong super reach effect during the variable display. The rate of executing the reach effect may be different.

As described above, the characteristic portion 005SG includes the following first invention. That is, in a gaming machine conventionally provided with an operable movable body, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-194091. For example, there is one that is capable of executing a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (acts on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, so there is a problem that the effect of the movable body effect is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the movable body effect, the game machine of the means 1 of the first invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5),
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301),
Equipped with
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and the movable body effect can be executed by displaying a specific image corresponding to the movable body on the display means (for example, effect control CPU 120). However, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display region 5E, and the image display device 5 can recognize the normal state before being transformed into the contracted state. Which displays the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B (see FIG. 9-3).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blade edge image 005SG002 is displayed as the specific image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 when the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display region 5E, The effect of the first movable body effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, not only by operating the first movable body 005SG301 so as to approach from the front toward the rear display area 5E, but also by displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B of the first movable body 005SG301. Since the second movable portion 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be viewed three-dimensionally as it is on the back side of the display area 5E, it is possible to enhance the effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The movable body can be modified into a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode, and is deformed from the first mode to the second mode when operating toward the display area of the display means. (For example, in accordance with an operation in which the CPU 120 for effect control moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E of the image display device 5 rearward and downward, the second movable portion. 005SG301B is accommodated in the first movable part 005SG301A to change the normal mode to the contracted mode),
In the movable body effect, it is possible to recognize the pre-deformation state of the movable body by displaying an image corresponding to the movable body of the first aspect as the specific image on the display means (for example, for effect control). In the first movable body effect, the CPU 120 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E, and recognizes the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode on the image display device 5. A portion that displays a cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the possible second movable portion 005SG301B (see FIG. 9-3).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the action of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E can be emphasized in that the normal state before the deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 can be recognized in the first movable body effect. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable body effect.

  Specifically, by deforming the first movable body 005SG301 in the contracted state, the first movable unit 005SG301A can be brought closer to the display region 5E than in the case where the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display region 5E in the normal state. The second movable portion 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be made to appear three-dimensionally so as to be on the far side of the display area 5E.

  Further, according to the actual operation of the first movable portion 005SG301A, the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B is displayed in association with the first movable portion 005SG301A, and thus the first movable body which is one object. Since 005SG301 can be recognized, a powerful first movable body effect can be realized.

A gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body effect, the movable body operates toward the effect display while the effect display is displayed on the display unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes A portion for moving the first movable portion 005SG301A of the movable body 005SG301 toward the symbol image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E),
The display means can display an image that penetrates the effect display as the specific image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode on the image display device 5). By displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B so as to be transparently superimposed on the design image 005SG001, the second movable portion 005SG301B penetrates the display area 5E and is three-dimensionally positioned so as to be positioned on the back side. The part that can be seen in Figure 9-3).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to realize an effect linked with the symbol image 005SG001 displayed on the image display device 5, and to improve the interest.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means can display a special image that can be viewed stereoscopically,
In the movable body effect, an image that emphasizes the movable body can be displayed as the special image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A). Is a part that can be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image (see FIG. 9-3A).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the effect image 005SG004 as a special image that emphasizes the first movable body 005SG301, it is possible to realize a stereoscopic effect and improve the interest. Specifically, the effect image 005SG004 can be made to appear on the front side of the display area 5E at a position corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301, so that a more stereoscopic effect can be realized.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 005SG, an example in which the image display device 5 capable of displaying a 3D image is used is illustrated as an example of the display unit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a 2D image is displayed. It may be possible display means.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, the form in which the first movable body 005SG301 is deformed from the normal state to the contracted state when moving from the intermediate position to the close position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 005SG301 may be moved toward the proximity position while being deformed from the normal state to the contracted state at the intermediate position or the first origin position.

Further, the characteristic part 005SG includes the following second invention. That is, in a gaming machine conventionally provided with an operable movable body, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-194091. For example, there is one that is capable of executing a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (acts on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, so there is a problem that the effect of the movable body effect is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the movable body effect, the game machine of the means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5),
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301),
Equipped with
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and the movable body effect can be executed by displaying a stereoscopically visible special image on the display means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, In the first movable body effect, while moving the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display region 5E, the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A on the image display device 5. A portion that can be displayed as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically (see FIG. 9-3A).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display area 5E, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable portion 005SG301A is displayed as a stereoscopically visible special image. Therefore, the effect of the first movable body effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, the operation mode of the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed by displaying a stereoscopically visible special image at the timing when the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front of the image display device 5 toward the rear display area 5E. Not only this, a sense of depth can be generated in the display mode of the special image by the image display device 5, so that the effect of production can be further enhanced.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
In the movable body effect, the display unit displays the special image in a region around the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first image in the first movable body effect). 1 A portion that can be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image of the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the movable portion 005SG301A (see FIG. 9-3 (A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a stereoscopic effect can be realized by displaying the effect image 005SG004 as the special image, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body effect, the special image is displayed on the display unit with an amount of parallax such that the image appears in front of the display unit (for example, for highlighting the first movable unit 005SG301A). Regarding the effect image 005SG004, the effect image 005SG004 is located in the vicinity of the first movable portion 005SG301A that is actually on the front side of the display area 5E, that is, at a position distant from the display area 5E on the front side in the same manner as the first movable portion 005SG301A. The part that can be shown as it is displayed (see Figure 9-3 (A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the action of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E can be emphasized, and the effect of the first movable body effect can be further enhanced.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The movable body is transformable into a first aspect and a second aspect that is smaller than the first aspect,
The movable body of the second aspect operates toward the display area of the display means, and the movable body effect of displaying a specific image corresponding to a part of the movable body of the first aspect on the display means is executed. Is possible,
The display unit displays the special image in at least one of a region around the specific image and a region around the movable body (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control makes the first movable object in the first movable object effect). The first movable part 005SG301A of the body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 is capable of recognizing the normal mode before being deformed into the contracted mode, and the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B. And an effect image 005SG301A for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A as a stereoscopic 3D image, and an effect for highlighting the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B. 2D image for image 005SG003 Capable Shimesuru portion. FIG. 9-3 (A) see)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize the normal state before the deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 in the first movable body effect, and thus it is possible to emphasize the action operation of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E and to specify it. The effect image 005SG004, which is a special image, is displayed in the area around the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable section 005SG301B, which is an image, and the area around the first movable section 005SG301A, in terms of displaying the specific image and the movable body. The sense of unity can be further emphasized, and the effect of the first movable body effect can be further enhanced.

A gaming machine according to means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
In the movable body effect, a special image having a shape simulating a small piece can be displayed as the special image on the display unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can stereoscopically view a fragment image 005SG006 of a decorative pattern in a 3D image). A part that can be displayed as. (See FIG. 9-3 (B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the action image of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E can be emphasized by the fragment image 005SG006 as a special image having a shape simulating a small piece, and the effect effect of the first movable body effect can be further enhanced. it can.

Further, the characteristic part 005SG includes the following third invention. That is, in a gaming machine conventionally provided with an operable movable body, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-194091. For example, there is one that is capable of executing a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (acts on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, so there is a problem that the effect of the movable body effect is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing a staging effect using a movable body, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5),
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301),
Equipped with
The movable body can be modified into a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
A first effect in which the movable body performs a first operation in which the movable body operates toward the display area of the display unit in the first aspect, and a second operation in which the movable body in the second aspect differs from the first operation. It is possible to execute a movable body effect including a second effect to be performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable object 005SG301 from the first origin position to the first advance position, ie, the first movable object effect). And a second movable body 005SG401 is moved from the second origin position to the second advance position while the first movable body 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position to the first advance position. (A part that can perform movable body production)
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed (for example, when the first movable body effect is executed during super reach and when the first movable object is executed). Part where the proportion controlled to the big hit game state is different from the case where 2 movable body effects are executed. (See FIG. 10-13)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one first movable body 005SG301 can realize different movable body effects in different modes and operations, and pay attention to which of the first movable body effect and the second movable object effect is executed. Let me improve my interest.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable body 005SG401) different from the first movable body,
In the second effect, the second movable body can operate together with the first movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position to the first advance position). A part where the second movable body effect that moves the second movable body 005SG401 from the second origin position to the second advancing position can be executed is also performed (see FIG. 9-2 (H)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of the second movable body effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the first effect, the second movable body is operable to overlap in front of the first movable body and to cover at least a part of a deformation mechanism of the first movable body (for example, The second movable body 005SG401 overlaps in front of the first movable body 005SG301 when moving to the second advanced position, and at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable body). Part 005SG301A and the second movable part 005SG301B) and the like) that is operable to cover the boundary part P. Modification, see FIG.
It is characterized by

  For example, in the second movable body effect, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves to the first advance position and the second movable body 005SG401 moves to the second advance position, the second movable body 005SG401 can be contracted and deformed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the second movable body 005SG401 is the second movable body 005SG301. When moving to the advance position, at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion 005SG301B) so as to overlap in front of the first movable body 005SG301. (Eg, the boundary portion P of the above) may be operable. By doing so, the visibility of the deforming mechanism can be reduced, and the appearance of the second movable body effect can be improved.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means (for example, the image display device 5) can execute a variable display effect (for example, a reach effect by a decorative pattern).
Depending on which of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the variable display effect, a second special variable display effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first special variable display effect is Different execution ratios (for example, when the first movable body effect is executed as the development effect, it is easy to shift to the weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, after the development effect. Parts where it is easy to shift to strong super reach, etc. (See Fig. 10-13)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player pays attention to which movable body effect is executed during the reach effect, the interest can be improved.

  The characteristic part 005SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic part 005SG, and the present invention can be made even if changes or additions are made without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the characteristic part 005SG, in the first movable body effect, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the second movable part 005SG301B. By displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002, the first movable body 005SG301, which is the one object, can be recognized, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 005SG301 is not necessarily limited to this. The first movable body 005SG301A and the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B may not be able to recognize the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, for example, the first movable portion of the first movable body 005SG301. When 005SG301A is moved toward the display area 5E, In the image display device 5, an effect image for highlighting the first movable body 005SG301 as a specific image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, as if the first movable body 005SG301 collides with the display area 5E). It is also possible to display the image to be shown).

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, is an object that imitates a sword, and the first movable portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion that can be housed in the first movable portion 005SG301A. Although the embodiment having the 005SG301B and being contractible and deformable is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body is not limited to an object imitating a sword. Further, it may not be contractible and deformable, but may be, for example, expandable or expandable, or may be deformable in shape such as being deformed from a circular shape to a rectangular shape. Further, it may be composed of a non-deformable object.

  In the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 is used as an example of the movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body 005SG401 may be used. Other movable bodies may be used.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, can move forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, and can move rearward and downward from the intermediate position toward the close position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first origin position may be the left and right lateral positions of the display area 5E as long as it is operable toward at least the display area 5E. It may be movable in the left-right direction from the left-right lateral position to the intermediate position.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, has a form in which it moves forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, that is, in a direction in which it moves away from the display region 5E. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to directly move downward and forward from the first origin position toward the near position without passing through the intermediate position. In addition, when the first origin position is the left and right lateral position of the display area 5E, the first origin position may be movable in the left and right direction from the left and right lateral position to the intermediate position along the display area 5E. Further, it may be movable in a curved shape so as to gradually approach from the first origin position toward the close position.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, is illustrated as being moved toward the display area 5E by moving (moving) rearward and downward from the intermediate position toward the proximity position. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, by deforming the movable body from the contracted mode to the normal mode (from the normal mode to the expanded mode), at least a part of the movable body approaches the display region 5E, At least a part of the movable body approaches the display area 5E by rotating the movable body. The image display device 5 may be operable toward the first movable body 005SG301.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, as an example of the specific image corresponding to the movable body, the image display device 5 uses the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific image corresponding to a movable body does not necessarily have to be an image capable of recognizing one object. Further, the image that makes it possible to recognize the one object does not necessarily show a part of the movable body. For example, by displaying an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the second movable portion 005SG301B, etc. The first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, may be recognized.

  In addition, the movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301) is operated toward the display area without being deformed, and a special image (for example, a model different from the movable body) is created as a specific image corresponding to the movable body. , An image simulating the second movable body 005SG401), another object including the movable body and the special image (for example, the first movable body 005SG301 and the second movable body 005SG401 are united by the movable body and the special image). One object) may be recognized.

  Further, the characteristic part 005SG is located at a close position so that the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, can be recognized by displaying the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B as a specific image. The form in which the blade edge image 005SG002 is displayed in the lower vicinity of the first movable body 005SG301 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the specific image is not the position described in the characteristic portion 005SG. Alternatively, it may be displayed at a position away from the movable body.

  In the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 moves rearward and downward from the intermediate position toward the proximity position, thereby approaching the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C in the display area 5E. Although the form in which the cutting edge image 005SG002 that penetrates the decorative pattern is displayed as the specific image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display that can be displayed by the display means is an effect other than the decorative pattern. It may be an image.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the case where the lower portion of the first movable body 005SG301 is close to the display region 5E when the first movable body 005SG301 is moved from the intermediate position to the close position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the display area 5E may be brought into contact with the display area 5E. Alternatively, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the intermediate position to the proximity position, a separate movable body (for example, the second movable body 005SG401) or a transparent member is provided between the first movable body 005SG301 and the display area 5E. The first movable body 005SG301 may be brought close to or in contact with the movable body by moving the above.

  For example, it may be an effect image imitating the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401, or may be a character image. Furthermore, the effect display may be an on-hold storage image capable of displaying an on-hold storage, an active display image indicating an active display area corresponding to the variable display, or the like. Furthermore, in the case where the effect display is the hold storage display image or the active display image, the display mode of the hold storage display or the active display may be changed by operating the movable body so as to act on these images. Good.

  In the characteristic part 005SG, in the first movable body effect, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display region 5E, and the first movable part 005SG301A is moved in the image display device 5. Although the form in which the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting is displayed as a 3D image that can be stereoscopically viewed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special image that can be stereoscopically displayed is the first movable portion 005SG301A. The effect image does not need to be highlighted, and for example, the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B may be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image. Further, an image (for example, a background image) that does not correspond to the first movable body 005SG301 may be displayed as a stereoscopically visible special image.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, a mode in which a fragment image 005SG006 of a decorative pattern is used as a special image having a shape imitating a small piece that can be stereoscopically viewed on the display unit is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an image that imitates a glass piece when the image display device 5 is destroyed, or an image that imitates a fragment when the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401 is destroyed can be displayed as a special image. May be

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the form in which the second movable body effect is applied as the second effect in which the movable body performs the second motion different from the first motion in the second mode has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the second motion of the first movable body 005SG301 in the second movable body effect is different from the first motion, for example, up and down, right and left along the display area 5E from the first origin position. In addition to the operation of moving away from the display area 5E from the first origin position to the first advance position, as described in the characteristic part 005SG.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, when the second movable body effect is executed during the super reach, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first movable body effect is executed has been exemplified, The present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different when the first movable body effect is executed and when the second movable body effect is executed. For example, when the first movable body effect is executed during the super reach, the jackpot gaming state may be controlled at a higher rate than when the second movable body effect is executed.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the form in which the big hit game state is applied as an advantageous state for the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state for the player is a definite change state. Includes various gaming states, such as a short win state (high base state), a small hit game state, a small hit frequently occurs, and a small hit high probability state (KT state) in which a game ball can be won in the big winning opening. ..

  In the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect, which are examples of the first effect and the second effect, are selectively executed at a predetermined timing in one variable display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first movable body effect is executed at the first timing (for example, the weak SP reach development timing) in one variable display period, and the first timing The second movable body effect may be executed at a different second timing (for example, strong SP reach development timing). In addition, the first movable body effect is executed at a first timing over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the start timing of the variable display before the target change), and a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the start of the target change). The second movable body effect may be executed at a timing).

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, as an example of the first effect and the second effect, a configuration in which a first movable body effect and a second movable body effect that are executed as a development effect executed during super reach are set is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are set as effects executed in the pre-reading notice, the big hit notice, the probability variation promotion effect, and the big hit mid effect. May be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the development effect is exemplified as the effect described as an effect indicating whether or not to develop from super reach to weak super reach or strong super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be executable at the timing of normal reach to super reach or at the timing of weak super reach to strong super reach. That is, it may be executed at a plurality of timings during one variable display. Further, in the case where it is possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit according to the occurrence of a start winning, and to execute a pre-reading notice (precursor effect, etc.) in which a suggestive effect corresponding to the determination result can be executed over a plurality of variable displays The development effect may be executable at a plurality of timings in a plurality of variable displays (for example, at the end or the start of each variable display).

  Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, when the first movable body effect is executed as the development effect, it is easy to shift to the weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, the strong effect is generated after the development effect. Although the mode in which it is easy to shift to the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect is executed in the reach mid effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the super-reach is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than that to the normal reach, and the rate at which the super-reach is executed may be different, or the special supermarket that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than the super-reach. The reach may be executed at different rates.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 177SG)
FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area 177SG10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 177SG50 having a glass window 177SG50a is rotatably provided around the left side, and the glass door frame 177SG50 can open and close the game area 177SG10. When the glass door frame 177SG50 is closed, the game area 177SG10 can be seen through the glass window 177SG50a.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1, the game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and obstructs the game board surface which is the front surface. It is composed of a board surface plate 2A provided with nails (not shown), guide rails 177SG2b, and the like, and a spacer member 2B integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and is a board board provided with obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 177SG2b on the game board surface which is the front surface. May be configured.

  At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 10A), a variable display of special symbols (also called special maps) as special identification information of a plurality of types (also called special maps game) The first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the second special symbol display device 177SG4B are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 177SG4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 177SG4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 177SG51 is provided in the opening 177SG2c of the game board 2.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, up and down). Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. In the display area, the first hold display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of the decorative pattern) whose execution is held is displayed right-justified, and the execution is held. The second hold display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of the decorative pattern) that is being displayed is displayed in the left-justified manner.

  A first reserved storage display area 177SG5D and a second reserved storage display area 177SG5U are set at two places on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending storage display area 177SG5D and the second pending storage display area 177SG5U, a pending storage display is displayed that allows the number of pending storages of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure pending storage number) to be specified.

  Here, in order to suspend the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B. ) Is generated based on the winning prize for starting. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is a round white display, and the second starting winning opening is The reserved memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) is also made into a round black display.

  In the following description, the first reserved storage display area 17′SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 177SG5U may be referred to as reserved display areas, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved storage display area 177SG5D and the second reserved storage area. It can be recognized by the number of reserved storage displays displayed in the storage display area 177SG5U. Further, the display in which the hold storage displays are collected may be referred to as a hold display.

  Whether the hold display in the first hold storage display area 177SG5D and the second hold storage display area 177SG5U is generated based on a start winning due to a game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, or The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether the game is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the starting winning opening. In this embodiment, "execution" and "execution" are synonymous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, together with the reserved storage display area, on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the second special symbol display device 177SG4B, to display the number of special symbol reserved storage can be specified A 1-hold indicator 177SG25A and a second-hold indicator 177SG25B are provided. The 1st reservation indicator 177SG25A displays the 1st special figure reservation storage number so that specification is possible. The second hold indicator 177SG25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories for which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable storage pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 177SG6A and a variable winning ball device 177SG6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 177SG6A forms, for example, a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 177SG6B is a normal electric accessory having a movable plate that is changed by a solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory (see FIG. 10-2) into a closed state in which it is in the first protruding position and an open state in which it is in the retracted position. And a second starting winning opening is formed. In the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable plate comes to the first projecting position, so that the movable plate projects toward the game area 177SG10, and the game ball is placed in the second starting winning port. It is in a closed state where it does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by being in the retracted position where the movable plate retracts to the game board 2 side when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. (It is also called that the second start winning opening is opened.). When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started.

  A special variable winning ball device 177SG7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 177SG6A and the variable winning ball device 177SG6B. The special variable winning ball device 177SG7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Forming a mouth.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole is also referred to as “winning prize”. In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 10-1), a normal symbol display device 177SG20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 177SG20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 177SG41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 177SG41, the universal figure game is executed.

  To the right of the normal symbol display device 177SG20, a universal symbol reservation display device 177SG25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 177SG25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  Between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof, a rendering device 177SG300 that operates according to the rendering is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 10-2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 10-2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41, the universal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 177SG20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 during the period during which the previous public figure game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 but the public figure game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 177SG6B for a predetermined period (the second starting winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset. It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by, for example, turning on / off, the operation of the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300, or the like.

  As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 10-2. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 177SG4A, second special symbol display device 177SG4B, normal symbol display device 177SG20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 177SG25A, the second hold display device 177SG25B, the universal figure hold display device 177SG25C, and the like is included.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 to a movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), control of a movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300, etc.) is performed. It may be executed by the control CPU 120.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Progress of games and production)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hit ball operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Progress of game controlled by main board 11)
When the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the passage gate 177SG41, a universal figure game (variable display of ordinary symbols) is started. In addition, when the general-purpose game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another general-purpose game is already running or during the opening control described below, the maximum amount of four general-purpose games is 4 Execution is suspended. The suspended general-purpose game is executed when the start condition for starting the general-purpose game is satisfied (eg, another general-purpose game is not executed and the opening control is not performed). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 when the number of reserved universal figures stored reaches the upper limit value, the number of reserved universal memories is not increased, and the passage is invalidated.

  The variable display result that is stopped and displayed in the figure game includes a figure figure per figure (for example, a figure such as "7") and a figure loss pattern (for example, a figure such as "-"). .. When the ordinary figure hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "universal figure hit". When the universal figure lost design is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "universal figure lost".

  In the case of "universal figure hit", opening control (the second start winning port is opened) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is tilted for a predetermined period. In the case of "universal figure loss", the opening control is not performed.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special figure game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special figure game is started. In addition, when the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already running or is being controlled to the jackpot gaming state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with the upper limit of the above. The suspended special figure game is executed when a start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed, and the jackpot is not in a gaming state, etc.).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be prize balls). When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening while the second special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value, the entry is invalidated without increasing the second special figure reservation storage number ( There may be prize balls).

  The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the number of the first special figure reserved memories, into the first starting winning opening is also called the first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the number of the second special figure reserved memories, into the second starting winning opening is also called the second starting winning. These prizes are collectively referred to simply as the starting prize.

  The variable display results stopped and displayed in the special figure game include a big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “−”). .. When the big hit symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "missed".

  When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is "big hit" (specific display result), the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variation display result is "miss", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is opened. The open state is until the earlier timing of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Will continue. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called "round"). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (the special winning opening is closed during the period other than the round game).

  In "big hit", big hit types such as "non-probable change" and "probable change" are set. When the jackpot type is "non-probable change", the jackpot symbol "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is “probability change”, the jackpot pattern “7” is stopped and displayed.

  The "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable change" may be called "probable change big hit", and the "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable change" may be called "non-probable change big hit". In addition, the jackpot gaming state based on the "probably strange jackpot" may be referred to as "probably variation jackpot game state". Moreover, the big hit game state based on the "non-probable variation big hit" may be called "non-probability variation big hit game state".

  After the probability variation big hit game state ends, the probability that the variation display result is "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to be a probability variation state higher than the normal state. The probability variation state continues until the next big hit game state is started.

  After the probability variation big hit game state or the non-probability variation big hit game state is finished, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a time saving state which is shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, one of the ending conditions is satisfied first of the fact that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present feature unit 177SG) and the next big hit game state is started. Continue until you do.

  In the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning port than in the non-time saving state which is not in the time saving state such as the normal state. You may change to. For example, the control to make the variation time of the ordinary symbols in the general-purpose game (the period for variable display of the universal figure, also called the universal figure variation time) shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display in each regular-purpose game The variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by control such that the probability that the result is “universal figure hit” is improved as compared with the case of the normal state. Such control is called high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). By controlling to such a time saving state, the time required until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the game state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  It should be noted that the normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, a time saving state, a probability variation state, or the like that is advantageous to the player, and the variation display result in the universal figure game is “common figure”. The probability of being a "hit" and the probability that the variation display result in the special figure game is a "big hit" will cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, the power is supplied. The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The time saving state is also referred to as "high base", and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also referred to as "low base" "non-time saving state". The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability” or “non-probability change”.

(Progress of the game controlled by the production control board 12)
In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the display result (variable display result) of the variable display of the decorative symbol ( A combination of three decorative patterns) is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a jackpot combination described later (“reach variation”). (Also referred to as “pattern”) is a display mode in which the fluctuation continues.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D having different effect modes are prepared. In this characteristic portion 177SG, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of super reach D> super reach C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, a rate at which the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", and here is also a rate at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "big hit".

  When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative design which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "big hit"). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display area 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R the same decorative pattern on a predetermined effective line (for example, "7" when the probability is a big hit, non-probably a big hit) At that time, "6" and the like) are all displayed together and displayed as a stop.

  When the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. There is. Further, when the variable display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss combination” (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed.

  Based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing various effects related to the game such as decorative display variable display control and notice effect. ..

  As the notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, a big notice notice effect indicating the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice indicating a reach or not, and a stop pattern. Multiple notices to be executed at the start of variable display or when the reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to give a notice, a latent notice to give a notice as to whether or not the gaming state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is latent) Including.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 177SG, as various effects including the above-mentioned notice, movable effect by the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 177SG300, combined effects by the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. .. It should be noted that these various effects are executed, for example, at a predetermined timing during variable display or at a timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In the present characteristic part 177SG, an effect using the effect device 177SG300 is executed at the time of executing the super reach (details will be described later).

(Production device 177SG300)
Next, details of effect device 177SG300 will be described based on FIGS. 10-3 to 10-15. FIG. 10C is a front view showing a state where the movable body of the rendering device is in the first position, and a state where the movable body of the rendering device is in the second position. FIG. 10-4 is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the structure of the effect device when viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the structure of the effect device when viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 10-6 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the structure of the movable body as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-7 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of the movable body as seen obliquely from behind. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the rotating portion is in the first protruding position, and FIG. 10B is a state in which the rotating portion is in the storage position. FIG. 10-9 is a fragmentary sectional view showing the structure of the lower part of the movable body. 10A is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the first drive mechanism, and FIG. 10B is a plan view showing the guided member. FIG. 10-11 is a plan view showing the relationship between the guide groove, the guided member, and the moving body. 10A to 10E are diagrams showing operation modes of the guided member and the movable portion. 10F to 13J are diagrams showing operation modes of the guided member and the movable portion. 10A to 14C are schematic explanatory views showing the relationship between the movable body and the image display device. FIGS. 10-15 are explanatory views showing a state where the movable body is in the lowered position, and a state where the movable body is in the raised position. FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation mode of a movable body in super reach.

  In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the vertical and horizontal directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as a reference.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-3 to 10-5, the rendering device 177SG300 is provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction and the up-down direction with respect to the base frame body 177SG301 and the base frame body 177SG301 that are formed in a square frame shape in a front view. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the first drive mechanism 177SG303 that moves the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the horizontal direction, and the second drive mechanism 177SG304 that moves the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the vertical direction. The image display device 5 can be viewed through the opening of the base frame body 177SG301. Movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R abut on each other as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) and a first position (origin position) that is separated from each other in the left-right direction, and as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B). It is movable in the left-right direction between a second position (which is also referred to as a coalescing position) that is close to), and at the second position, the lower position shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) and the lower position shown in FIG. 10-3 (B). It is movable up and down with respect to the ascending position shown, and further, the orientation (posture) is changeable at a third position between the first position and the second position.

  Next, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are formed symmetrically and have substantially the same structure, the left movable body 177SG302L will be described below, and the right movable body 177SG302R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the movable body 177SG302L is movable in the left-right direction by the first drive mechanism 177SG303, and is provided in a non-rotatable movable body 177SG310 and a lower position of the movable body 177SG310. A guided member 177SG320 that is moved and guided by guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, which will be described later, and an upper position of the moving body 177SG310 are rotatable together with the guided member 177SG320, and vertically with respect to the moving body 177SG310 and the guided member 177SG320. And a movable portion 177SG330 movably provided.

  The movable portion 177SG330 is pedestal 177SG331 attached to the upper end of a rotating shaft 177SG311 that vertically penetrates the moving body 177SG310, and is rotatable above the pedestal 177SG331 about a guide rod 177SG337, which will be described later, and is vertically movable. The rotation base 177SG332 provided, a front cover 177SG333 covering the front side of the rotation base 177SG332, a rear cover 177SG334 covering the back side of the rotation base 177SG332, and a vertical rotation with respect to the rotation base 177SG332. And a rotating member 177SG335 provided on the main body.

  A guide rod 177SG337 that is oriented in the up-down direction is provided upright on the upper left front corner of the pedestal 177SG331, and the rotation base 177SG332 is guided so as to be movable in the up-down direction, and at the same time, the upper right rear of the pedestal 177SG331. A rotation stop member 177SG336 is provided upright at the corner portion for restricting rotation around the guide rod 177SG337. The rotation stopping member 177SG336 has a length that allows the rotation base 177SG332 to restrict rotation between a lowering position and a rising position, which will be described later.

  An LED board 177SG339, on which a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338F is mounted so as to irradiate light forward, is mounted on the upper front surface of the rotating base 177SG332, and the movable LED 177SG338F emits light to thereby emit light from the movable LED 177SG338F. Light is emitted to the outside through the light transmitting lens portion 177SG340F formed on the front cover 177SG333. Further, although not particularly shown, a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338B are mounted on the back surface of the LED board 177SG339 so that the movable LEDs 177SG338B can emit light toward the front, and the movable LEDs 177SG338B emit light to emit light from the movable LEDs 177SG338B to the rear cover. The light is transmitted to the outside through the light transmitting lens portion 177SG340B formed on the 177SG334.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8, a first rotating shaft 177SG360 which is oriented in the front-rear direction is projectingly provided on a lower portion of the front surface of the rotating base 177SG332, and the first rotating shaft 177SG360 is provided on the first rotating shaft 177SG360. A first link member 177SG361 whose one end is pivotally supported by the first shaft portion of the rotating member 177SG335 via a pivot 177SG364 is rotatably supported. A second rotating shaft 177SG362 is provided on the front surface of the rotating base 177SG332 below the first rotating shaft 177SG360 so as to project therefrom. One end of the second rotating shaft 177SG362 is the first of the rotating member 177SG335. A second link member 177SG363 pivotally supported on the two shafts via a pivot 177SG365 is rotatably supported.

  An arcuate gear portion 177SG366 is formed on a part of the peripheral edge of the second rotation shaft 177SG362 in the second link member 177SG363, and the gear portion 177SG366 is fixed to the rear surface of the rotation base 177SG332 for rotation. A drive gear 177SG368 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 177SG367 is meshed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the rotating member 177SG335 has a first protruding position (origin position) protruding downward to the right with respect to the rotating base 177SG332, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). Between the first projection position and the accommodation position (see FIG. 10-8 (B)) retracted to the rotation base 177SG332 side and a part is accommodated between the rotation base 177SG332 and the front cover 177SG333. It is rotatably provided. Further, between the first projecting position (origin position, see FIG. 10-3 (A)) and the accommodation position, the second projecting position projecting rightward and upward with respect to the rotation base 177SG332 (see FIG. 10-3 (B)). ) Is also possible to stop.

  Specifically, at the first protruding position shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the upper portion of the second link member 177SG363 slightly tilts to the left side and abuts the boss 177SG369 provided on the rotation base 177SG332 so as to be counterclockwise. The downward rotation of the rotating member 177SG335 is restricted by the restriction of the rotation of the rotating member 177SG335. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), as the drive gear 177SG368 rotates by the rotation motor 177SG367, the second link member 177SG363 rotates clockwise and the pivot 177SG365 rotates second. The first link member 177SG361 rotates counterclockwise as the shaft 177SG362 moves in an arc shape, and the pivot 177SG364 moves in an arc shape centered on the first rotation shaft 177SG360 to rotate. The member 177SG335 rotates from the first protruding position toward the accommodation position. Since the two positions are thus pivotally supported by the two first link members 177SG361 and the second link members 177SG363, it is possible to rotate more compactly than rotating about one axis.

  At the upper end of the front cover 177SG333, fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4) extending in the left-right direction on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301 and between the fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R. A guide portion 177SG342, which is guided to move in the left-right direction by a movable rail 177SG351 provided so as to be movable in the up-down direction, is rotatably attached to a rotation base 177SG332 about a shaft portion 177SG343 that faces the up-down direction.

  As described above, the movable portion 177SG330 includes the movable base portion 177SG330A that is configured by attaching the front cover 177SG333 and the rear cover 177SG334 to the front and rear surfaces of the rotation base 177SG332 and integrating the movable base portion 177SG330A and the movable base portion 177SG330A. And a rotating portion 177SG330B configured to be rotatable in the direction, the rotating portion 177SG330B is in a first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the first protruding position or the second protruding position, and the rotating portion 177SG330B. It is possible to change to the second state in the storage position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the movable base portion 177SG330A has a half of the body of the airplane, the rotating portion 177SG330B has a shape imitating a blade, the movable body 177SG302L is the right half of the airplane, and the movable body 177SG302R is It is a model that makes up the left half of an airplane. On the other hand, frame body covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R imitating a half of an airplane having translucent lens portions 177SG371L and 177SG371R are attached to the left and right sides of the base frame body 177SG301.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position, the right half of the airplane is modeled by the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L. One first left rendering unit is formed, and the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370R of the movable body 177SG302R on the right side form one first right rendering unit imitating the left half of the airplane.

  As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the second position, the rear cover 177SG334 of the left movable body 177SG302L and the rear cover 177SG334 of the right movable body 177SG302R move to the left and right. By arranging them side by side and combining them, one second effect part imitating the entire airplane is formed.

  In addition, a part of the first left effect part and the first right effect part include a translucent lens part 177SG340F of the front cover 177SG333 and a translucent lens part 177SG371L, 177SG371R of the frame body covers 177SG370L, 177SG370R, which imitates a half of a cockpit. One first light emitting portion is configured by, and one second light emitting portion is configured by the left and right translucent lens portions 177SG340B and 177SG340B that imitate half of the cockpit of the rear cover 177SG334 in a part of the second effect portion. It

  As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 (A), a vertical hole 177SG312 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310, and a rotary shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312. Has been done. The upper part of the rotating shaft 177SG311 is non-rotatably fitted in the shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the pedestal 177SG331. Further, a horizontal hole 177SG314 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310 so as not to intersect the vertical hole 177SG312, and a rotary shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted in the vertical hole 177SG312.

  The rotating shaft 177SG311 has an upper part non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the pedestal 177SG331, and a lower part non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG321 of the guided member 177SG320. That is, since the movable portion 177SG330 and the guided member 177SG320 are integrated via the rotary shaft 177SG311, the guided member 177SG320 constitutes a part of the movable portion 177SG330.

  As shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the guided member 177SG320 is a disk-shaped member centered on the circular shaft hole 177SG321. Contact recesses 177SG322A, 177SG322B capable of accommodating contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B, which will be described later, are formed at two positions on the right side of the peripheral wall at intervals of about 90 degrees, and a locking recess 177SG323 is formed on the left side of the peripheral wall. Are formed. In addition, the peripheral wall 177SG322C on the rear side of the contact recess 177SG322A and the peripheral wall 177SG322D on the front side of the contact recess 177SG322B are located outside the arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 10-10B). The peripheral walls 177SG322E, 177SG322F that extend and linearly extend leftward from the tips of these peripheral walls 177SG322C, 177SG322D are substantially parallel to each other. That is, the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 that project outward from the arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 are formed at the distal ends of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322E and the peripheral walls 177SG322D and 177SG322F, respectively. The guide member 177SG320 is formed in a non-circular shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-10 to 10-13, linear guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R that guide the moving body 177SG310 in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the member forming the lower side of the base frame body 177SG301. Has been done. Specifically, the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R are formed by the bottom wall 177SG381, the front wall 177SG382, and the rear wall 177SG383 into a groove shape that opens upward in a vertical cross-sectional view, and the guided member 177SG320 is provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Has been. The front-back dimension L1 of the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R is slightly longer than the diameter 2R of the guided member 177SG320, and is shorter than the dimension L2 passing through the apex and the center of the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A, 177SG325 of the guided member 177SG320. (2R <L1 <L2).

  A transmission gear group 177SG392R that is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the first position at the left and right ends of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, respectively. A locking piece 177SG324B that is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the second position is provided, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set at the first position and Restrict rotation at the second position.

  Cylindrical abutting bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B are erected at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 177SG381 in the vicinity of the rear wall 177SG383 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the left-right direction. Further, a portion of the rear wall 177SG383 corresponding to each of the contacting bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B is bulged rearward, and can accommodate the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A, 177SG325 when the guided member 177SG320 rotates as described later. Recesses 177SG386A and 177SG386B are formed inside. A bearing portion 177SG387 is formed between the left and right guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R.

  The first drive mechanism 177SG303 includes drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R for moving the moving body 177SG310, moving motors 117SG391L and 117SG391R for rotating the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R around their axes, and moving motors 117 and SG1G39L. The transmission gear group 177SG392L, 177SG392R that is composed of a plurality of driven gears that transmits the power of the 117SG391R to the drive shafts 177SG390L, 177SG390R is mainly configured.

  The first drive mechanism 117SG303 includes an origin detection sensor 177SG401 capable of detecting that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position (first position) and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the combined position (second position). A combination detection sensor 177SG402 capable of detecting that the combination is located at a position), and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 and the combination detection sensor 177SG402 are connected to the effect control board 12.

  The drive shafts 177SG390L, 177SG390R are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side of the front wall 177SG382, one end is pivotally supported by the central bearing portion 177SG387, and the other end is provided on the left and right portions of the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R. It is supported. The moving body 177SG310 is inserted into the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R through the lateral holes 177SG314, and the inner periphery of the lateral holes 177SG314 is formed in the concave groove 177SG390A formed in a spiral shape on the peripheral surface of the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R. A locking portion 177SG315 protruding from the surface is slidably locked. Therefore, in the moving body 177SG310, the guided member 177SG320 connected through the rotary shaft 177SG311 is guided movably in the left and right directions by the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, and the rotation around the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R is restricted. Therefore, the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R rotate to move in the left-right direction.

  Next, operation modes of the first drive mechanism 177SG303 and the movable body 177SG302L will be described based on FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are bilaterally symmetrical and have substantially the same operation mode, only the operation mode of the movable body 177SG302L will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), when the movable body 177SG302L is at the first position, the guided member 177SG320 is in a state where the transmission gear group 177SG392R is locked in the locking recess 177SG323 at the left end of the guide groove 177SG380L. Is maintained at. At this time, in the movable portion 177SG330, the front cover 177SG333 faces forward and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the first protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), the drive motor 177SG391L causes the drive shaft 177SG390L to rotate, whereby the moving body 177SG310 moves toward the right side. At this time, in the guided member 177SG320, the peripheral wall 177SG322E is substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382, and the peripheral wall 177SG322F is substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383, so that the rotation about the rotation shaft 177SG311 is restricted. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves to the right without changing the direction. The peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A when the peripheral wall 177SG322C is moved to the third position between the first position and the second position.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (C) and 10-12 (D), the contacting boss 177SG385A is arranged at a position rearwardly displaced from the movement trajectory of the rotating shaft 177SG311 which is the center of the guided member 177SG320. As a result, the moving body 177SG310 continues to move to the right, and when the peripheral wall 177SG322C abuts the abutment boss 177SG385A at the third position, the movable body 177SG310 moves to the right while maintaining the abutting contact. As a result, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise about the contact boss 177SG385A. Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10-12C, the tip of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325A is housed in the housing recess 177SG386A, so that the guided member 177SG320 is allowed to rotate in the guide groove 177SG380L. .. The contact boss 177SG385A is housed in the contact recess 177SG322A as the guided member 177SG320 rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (E), when the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 90 degrees after the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A. As it is, the peripheral wall 177SG322D of the contact recess 177SG322B contacts the contact boss 177SG385B.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (F) to 10-13 (H), the state in which the peripheral wall 177SG322C is in contact with the contact boss 177SG385A by the moving body 177SG310 continuing to move in the right direction. Although it is released, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise about the contact boss 177SG385B by continuing to move to the right while maintaining the state where the peripheral wall 177SG322D contacts the contact boss 177SG385B. To go. Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10-13 (H), the guided member 177SG320 is allowed to rotate by housing the tip of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325B in the housing recess 177SG386B. Further, as the guided member 177SG320 rotates, the contact boss 177SG385B is housed in the contact recess 177SG322B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (I), with the rotation of the guided member 177SG320 by about 180 degrees, the movable portion 177SG330 integrated with the guided member 177SG320 moves about 180 degrees about the rotation shaft 177SG311. The direction (posture) is changed by rotating. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (B) to 10-13 (I), two abutment bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are arranged apart from each other in the moving direction of the movable body 177SG302L, and the peripheral wall 177SG322C is abutted. The state in which it abuts on the boss 177SG385A is released, and the peripheral wall 177SG322D abuts on the abutment boss 177SG385B, so that the rotation continues.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13 (J), after the contact state of the peripheral wall 177SG322D from the contact boss 177SG385B is released, the peripheral wall 177SG322D moves to the right without changing the direction. At this time, in the guided member 177SG320, the peripheral wall 177SG322F is substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382, and the peripheral wall 177SG322E is substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383, so that the rotation about the rotation shaft 177SG311 is restricted. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves to the right without changing the direction. When the movable body 177SG302L reaches the second position, the guided member 177SG320 is maintained in a state in which the locking piece 177SG324B is locked in the locking recess 177SG323 at the right end of the guide groove 177SG380L. At this time, in the movable portion 177SG330, the rear cover 177SG334 faces forward and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the storage position.

  Although details of the operation mode when the movable body 177SG302L moves from the second position to the first position will be omitted, the movable body 177SG302L rotates in the opposite direction to the direction when moving from the first position to the second position and the direction changes. It will be.

  As described above, the movable body 177SG302L comes into contact with the abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B at the third position during the movement from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position. The guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees by continuing to move to the right or left while maintaining the state, so that the direction (posture) of the movable portion 177SG330 changes from the forward direction (first attitude) to the backward direction (second attitude). ) Is changed to.

  Next, the positional relationship between the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the image display device 5 and the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the first position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the first protruding position. The separation dimension L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length dimension L4 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the first protruding position (L3 < L4), when the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is protruding to the first protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. Will end up.

  When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the second position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the second protruding position. The separation dimension L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length dimension L5 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the second protruding position (L3 < L5), when the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is protruding to the second protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. Will end up.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (C), before the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate, that is, before the movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R reaches the third position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is set at the first protruding position or the second protruding position. Instead, by moving the movable portion 177SG330 from the first state to the second state, the separation dimension L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the storage position. Since it is longer than the length dimension L6 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B (L3> L6), the rotating portion 177SG330B is prevented from coming into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5 during rotation. It

  Next, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 will be described based on FIGS. 10-4, 10-5, and 10-15. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 includes a lifting motor 177SG305 fixed to a mounting member 177SG308 mounted on the rear surface of the upper side of the base frame 177SG301, and a lifting motor 177SG305. A driven gear 177SG306 that meshes with the drive gear 177SG305A, and a connection elongated hole 177SG307A having one end pivotally supported by the mounting member 177SG308 and a connection shaft 177SG306A projecting in the vicinity of the peripheral portion of the front surface of the driven gear 177SG306. An elevating arm 177SG307 having a movable rail 177SG351 pivotally supported at its tip is provided.

  In the movable rail 177SG351, the guide rollers 177SG352 and 177SG352 provided on the left and right sides of the rear surface are vertically inserted by being inserted into a pair of left and right elevating guides 177SG353 and 177SG353 which are formed on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301 and which face the vertical direction. You are being guided. Further, between the elevating guides 177SG353 and 177SG353, a long hole 177SG354 for inserting the connecting shaft of the tip of the elevating arm 177SG307 and the movable rail 177SG351 is formed in the vertical direction. In the second drive mechanism 177SG304 configured in this manner, the movable rail 177SG351 moves in the vertical direction when the lifting motor 177SG305 rotates the lifting arm 177SG307 about one end.

  Next, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 10-16 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-16 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), the determination result (preliminary determination result) whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” and the variable display result are Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the big hit type in the case of “big hit”.

  In the variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variation display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variation big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "uncertain variation big hit".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating a variable stop (decision) of a decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designating command corresponding to the game state (low accurate low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H performs the time saving control. On the other hand, the second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (low certainty high base state, time saving state) in which the probability variation control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high-probability low base state, no time saving probable variation state) in which the time variation control is performed but the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9503H is the time variation control and the probability variation. It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability high-base state, time-shortening probability variation state) in which control is performed together.

  The command A0XXH is a big hit start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening is in a changed state from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

  In the big hit start designation command and the big hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command. .. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the special winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round is executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 177SG4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first reserved storage number in order to display the special reservation storage number in the first reserved storage display area 5D or the like so as to be specified. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the second reserved storage display area 5U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIGS. 10-17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, a variation pattern determination. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby generating one of the random number values MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which shows a part.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit and the big hit game state is set. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" to "probable variation big hit A", "probability variation big hit B", or "non-probability variation". It is a random number value, and takes a value in the range of, for example, "1" to "100".

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to " It takes a value in the range of "997".

  The random number MR4 for determining the figure display result is used to determine whether the variation display result in the figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is "per figure" or "missing figure". It is a random number value that is set, and takes a value in the range of, for example, “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 10-18 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

  For the jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern, the normal reach variation pattern that the normal reach reach effect is executed and the super reach reach effect such as Super Reach A, Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach D are executed. There are fluctuation patterns. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as with super reach, normal reach A, normal reach B, ... As described above, a plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, five or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach E, super reach F, ... May be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10-18, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effects of super reach such as super reach A to super reach D in the feature unit 177SG of the present embodiment are executed, the super reach effect of super reach D is executed. The variation pattern that has the longest special pattern variation time is set, and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C is executed next, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach B is executed, and the super reach A The special figure variation time is set to be long in the order of variation patterns in which the super reach effect is executed.

  In the feature section 177SG of the present embodiment, the super-reach D, super-reach C, super-reach B, super-reach A, and normal reach are set in the order of the variable display result to be "big hit". Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. A variation pattern belonging to a variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  In addition, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D are executed in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment are both movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during variable display. Is a variation pattern that moves (moves) from the origin position to the combined position, but the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C is executed may be selected only during the time saving control (high base). On the other hand, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is executed is a variation pattern which may be selected regardless of whether or not the time saving control is being performed.

  Further, the variation pattern of Super Reach C is a variation pattern of moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position to the coalescence position while the push button 31B is operated, while the variation pattern of Super Reach D is: This is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position to the combined position regardless of the operation of the push button 31B (see FIGS. 10-28). In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach C is exemplified only during the time saving control (high base), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variation pattern of the super reach C may be provided when it is selected during the normal state (low base).

  Further, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the variable display is performed in the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is performed, the variation display result is lost. However, the present invention exemplifies a form in which the variable display result is always a big hit when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display is performed in the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is performed, the variation display result may be lost. ..

  In the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game control program, various selection data used for controlling the progress of the game, table data, etc. are stored. .. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, decisions, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, a plurality of table data forming a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIGS. Table data and the like forming a variation pattern table for storing types are stored.

  10-19 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table that is common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to for determining whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special sign display result. It's a table.

  In the display result determination table of the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the determination data to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), more determination values are obtained than when it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). , Is assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, compared with the probability determined (about 1/300 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes higher (this embodiment. Approximately 1/30 in morphological feature 177SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than that in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  10-20 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit" the special map display result, based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type It is a table that is referred to when determining one of a plurality of types. In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment depending on whether it is a special drawing game by the symbol display device 177SG4B) is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B". Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-20 (B). In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, after the end of the jackpot gaming state. High-precision control and time-shortening control are executed and shift to high-accuracy high-base state Probability variation big hit A and probability variation big-hit B, and after completion of the big-hit game state, only time-saving control is executed and transition to low-precision high-base state The non-probable variation jackpot is set.

  In the big hit game state by "probability variation big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability variation big hit", as described above, 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called). 16 rounds), a regular open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by "probable variation big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, "probability variation big hit A" may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation jackpot, and "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state of the probability-change big hit A or the probability-change big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit which is generated again is the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B, since the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, the big hit game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability variation big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 177SG of this embodiment), or the predetermined Before the special figure game of the number of times is executed, the big hit game state is brought to an end.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. The assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of is different. That is, when the variation special map is the first special map, the determination value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B” having a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types on the basis that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is satisfied Thus, the proportion of determining the jackpot type as “probable variation jackpot B” with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probable variation big hit B" to be controlled to a short-term open big-jack state with a small number of rounds. In the gaming state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, it is possible to avoid frequent short-term open jackpot conditions with few prize balls to be obtained, and to reduce the interest in the game. It can be prevented.

  In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), the determination value is assigned to the "non-probable change" jackpot type by the variation special chart being the first special chart or the second special chart. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are present or not, the probability of a non-probable variation big hit and the probability of a certain probability variation big hit are the same regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It is said that.

  Therefore, as described above, the determination value allocation to the "probability variation big hit B" differs depending on whether the variation special map is the first special chart or the second special chart, and accordingly, "probability variation big hit A". Also, the allocation of the judgment value to "is different depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. For" probability variation big hit A "with many rounds, the variation special chart is the second special chart. It is set so that it can be determined more easily in the case of (1) than in the case of the first special figure.

  Even when the variation special map is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from that when the variation special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probable variation big hit B". May be. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the special figure display result is "missed" A variation pattern determination table for loss, which is used when it is predetermined to do so, is prepared in advance.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, a normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), a super reach A jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), a super reach B jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), a super reach D For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-5) of the big hit, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, a variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), a variation pattern of the super reach A jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern of the super reach B jackpot (PB1-3), time saving control in progress. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach C big hit corresponding to, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, when the determination value is a type of big hit is "probable variation big hit A" or "probability variation big hit B", super reach B is easily determined, and the type of big hit is In the case of "non-probable variation big hit", since the super reach A is assigned so that it can be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach B is executed, "probability variation big hit A" or "probability variation big hit B". It is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be.

  The variation pattern determination table for loss is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storage is 2 to 4. Loss variation pattern determination table B, loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8, and a gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed The variation pattern determination table for loss D used for the above is prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach A loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of B-miss (PA2-3) within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing. Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach A loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. PA2-2), variation pattern of super-reach B loss (PA2-3), variation pattern of super-reach C loss (PA2-4) A numerical value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-18, the variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening of the fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display is lengthened.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 in the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 first clears the RAM area, sets various initial values, and initializes a timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms). The first initialization process (177SGS050) and the second initialization process (177SGS051) for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position and confirming the operation are performed, and the processes of S73 to S77 shown in FIG. 6 are performed. Run.

  Here, the second initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23. FIG. 10-22 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection time operation control, the detection time operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the production control CPU 120. 10-23, (A) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, (B) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the detection operation control, and (C) is the non-detection operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows control speed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-22, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between an origin position (first position) and a coalescing position (second position), respectively. The forward operation to the (second position) and the return operation from the combined position to the origin position are performed by the effect control CPU 120 by performing the effect character object operation processing and the effect character object storage processing, which will be described later, to the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. This is an actual operation mode.

  Production control CPU120, when the detected part of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization processing is executed, that is, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302 is for some reason (for example, transportation or If it has moved from the origin position when it is installed on the game island, or if the origin could not be restored during the previous operation (for example, when performing the performance, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302 due to step-out, failure, catching, etc. of the motor). A position other than the origin position (for example, when a movable object error (operation abnormality) such as unable to confirm the origin return of the device or operation cannot be performed), or when the machine moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine (for example, When not detected in Fig.10-22 Such as the position indicated by a black circle corresponding to create control, when in position) between the home position and united position, perform a non-detection operation control for homing. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 toward the origin position.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes detection-time operation control when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization process is executed.

  For example, from the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 to the origin position direction of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 so that the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are surely detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. When a predetermined operable range (for example, play) is set before the operation is restricted, the origin is returned and the position is further displaced from the position detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. May stop in position. Therefore, even when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the detection-time operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this operation control during detection, it is necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Since it is not necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned to the original position after being moved from the original position to the detection operation position near the original position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (a movable body effect described later).

  Next, the control speeds set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A), 10-23 (B), and 10-23 (C) are controls set by the production control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. The speed is different from the actual operating speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the united position, one movement section When the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring, a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or a case where the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, if the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R have different sizes, weights, operating modes, operating distances, drive mechanisms, etc., the movable bodies 177SG302L , 177SG302R does not always have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, the size, weight, and weight of each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), when performing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. Then, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the control speed which is set. Specifically, the control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, it is decelerated and stopped at the combined position, and after accelerating from the combined position, it is decelerated and stopped at the original position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can operate normally, a speed priority mode (moving motor 177SG391L, movement motor 177SG391L, As a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at high speed (maximum speed) instead of the small torque of 177SG391R, see FIG. Change. That is, when performing the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R effect of each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, the effect control CPU 120 has the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of (high speed), even when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the minimum speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the control speeds are set to the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the lowest control speed, the operation is performed at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the highest control speed, the operation is performed at the highest speed. It will be described as one that operates.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during acceleration and deceleration becomes the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when the movable body 177SG302L, the movable body 177SG302L, by controlling to return to the origin position after moving to the united position, it is controlled to be the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopped at the united position. The origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected portion after the 177SG302R is surely decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), when performing the detection-time operation control, the effect control CPU 120 will be described later in the period of moving from the origin position to the coalescing position and the period of moving from the coalescing position to the origin position. As a torque priority mode (a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of the torque of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R being large, see Fig. 10-27), the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation is always used. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are controlled to operate at the (first speed). That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. Then, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always set based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed becomes the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. Control to operate.

  Further, in the case of the motion control during detection, since the motion distance of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is shorter than that in the motion control for actual motion confirmation, when the motion control for actual motion confirmation is performed, that is, when the motion is performed at a high speed. , The origin detection sensor 177SG401 cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the like are damaged by the impact when the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are returned to the origin position from a short distance and movement is restricted. Therefore, it is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (C), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the united position to the origin position. As a torque priority mode (see FIG. 10-27), which will be described later, control is performed such that the operation always operates at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic part 177SG of the form, the speed is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R.

  In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is returned to the origin position when it is operated at the control speed at the time of acceleration, that is, at a high speed, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or the movable body 177SG302L is detected from a short distance. , 177SG302R returns to the origin position and is restricted in movement, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the like may be damaged. ..

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 117SG of the present embodiment, in the second initialization processing, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are moved at high speed (maximum speed) instead of the torque of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R being small. By executing the actual operation confirming operation control in the speed priority mode capable of performing the above, the actual operation confirming operation control can be quickly completed.

  On the other hand, in the second initialization processing, in the torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of the torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R being large, detection operation confirmation operation control and non-detection are performed. By executing the time operation control, a torque larger than the torque required for rotation when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the origin position can be obtained, so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the origin position. It is possible to reliably move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position while preventing them from stopping without rotating on the way.

  FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable-during-display effect process in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1 (177SGS301, 177SGS302, 177SGS303). The process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer are values set in the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7 for executing the effect during the variable display.

  In 177SG304, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (177SGS305). That is, in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7, the process timer is set by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table set according to the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed, to the process timer. Start again (177SGS306). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next (177SGS307). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production) is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Parts) control is executed (177SGS308).

  After the execution of 177SGS307 or 177SGS308, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the process data being executed is the process data of the super reach C, that is, whether the variable display of the change pattern of the super reach C is being executed. It is determined (177SGS310). If the process data being executed is not the process data of super reach C (177SGS310; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321. If the process data being executed is the process data of super reach C (177SGS310; Y), the movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R is determined to be the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B for moving the 177SG302R from the origin position to the combined position (177SGS311).

  When it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (177SGS311; Y), the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 (FIG. 10-30 (A)) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B on the image display device 5. (Refer to 177SGS312) and proceed to 177SGS313. If it is not the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (177SGS311; N), the process of 177SGS312 is not executed and the process proceeds to 177SGS313.

  In 177SGS313, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period (177SGS313). When it is during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (177SGS313; Y), the effect auditor operation process for operating the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS314). ) Proceed to 177 SGS 320.

  If it is not during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (177SGS313; N), it is determined whether it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (177SGS315). When it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (177SGS315; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 on the image display device 5 is terminated (177SGS316), and the accessory action start flag described later is set. If so, the accessory operation start flag is cleared (177SGS317) and the process proceeds to 177SGS318.

  If the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B is not reached in 177SGS315 (177SGS315; N), the process of 177SGS316 and 177SGS317 is not executed and the process proceeds to 177SGS318.

  Then, in 177SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B has already elapsed (177SGS318). When the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B has not yet elapsed (177SGS318; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B has elapsed (177SGS318; Y), the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Is ON, that is, whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 (177SGS319).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS319; Y), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SGS319; N), the role object (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is moved from the combined position to the origin position. The effect character storage process for moving and storing the target product is executed (177SGS320), and the process proceeds to 177SGS321.

  In 177SGS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation control timer has timed out (177SGS321). When the fluctuation control timer is timed out (177SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-middle-right decorative design (30 ms after the display switching time of the previous decorative design). Image data of a screen to be created) and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (177SGS322). In this way, in the image display device 5, variation control of the decorative pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Also, the fluctuation control timer is reset to a predetermined value (177SGS323).

  Moreover, when the variation control timer has not timed out (177SGS321; N), after execution of 177SGS323, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (177SGS324). If the variable time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the special figure per wait process (S173) (177SGS326). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (177SGS325; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the special figure waiting process ( The value is updated to a value according to S173) (177SGS326). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, it moves to the control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Even when it is received, it is possible to end the variation of the decorative pattern when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the decorative pattern, the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variation time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of 177SGS304, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the decorative symbol effect control based on the process table ends. To do.

  FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart of an example of the performance effect operation process in the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the production accessory operation process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the push button 31B is operated (177SGS331). When the push button 31B is operated (177SGS331; Y), it is further determined whether or not the accessory operating flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is operating is set (177SGS332). ). When the accessory operating flag is not set (177SGS332; N), it is determined whether the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, whether the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have been moved to the combination position. The determination is made (177SGS333).

  When the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS333; Y), the effect winning object operation process is ended, and when the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS333; N), that is, to the combination position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. If the movement of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R has been started based on the operation of the push button 31B even once during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the accessory action start flag is displayed. Is set (177SGS334).

  When the accessory operation start flag is not set (177SGS334; N), output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is started (177SGS335). Further, the accessory operation start flag and the accessory operating flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is operating are set, and the effect accessory operation processing is ended (177SGS336, 177SG337).

  As shown in FIG. 10-27, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment reduce the torque in response to the operation instruction from the effect control CPU 120, while moving the movable body 177SG302L ,. A speed priority mode in which the 177SG302R can be moved at a high speed and a low biasing force, and a torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at a low speed and a high biasing force while the torque is greater than the speed priority mode. It can be driven in the mode and.

  Returning to FIG. 10-25, when the accessory operation start flag is set in 177SGS334 (177SGS334; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, at least once. Indicates that the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are moved from the origin position because the operation of the push buttons 31B is not continuously executed even though the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R is started based on the operation of the push button 31B. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has hardly moved (177SGS338).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS338; Y), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, the movable body rotates while moving from the origin position toward the combined position (Fig. 10-12 to FIG. 10-13), based on the fact that sufficient acceleration can be obtained, the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is started (177SGS335). , The accessory operation start flag is set, and the process proceeds to 177SGS337 (177SGS336). On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SG338; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are separated from the origin position, that is, rotate while moving from the origin position toward the united position ( (See FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) Based on the fact that there is a possibility that sufficient acceleration cannot be obtained, the movement instruction output in the torque priority mode is output to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. It starts (177SGS339), sets a character product operation flag, and ends the director character product operation process (177SGS337).

  When the accessory working flag is set in 177SGS332 (177SGS332; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, the union position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. (177SGS340) is determined. When the combined detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS340; N), the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode or the operation instruction in the torque priority mode to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is continued by ending the performance accessory operation processing. Then, the operation of the movable bodies 177SGS302L and 177SGS302R is continuously executed. When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS340; Y), the driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped by outputting a stop instruction to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342), The character product operating flag is cleared (177SGS343), and the effect character product operation processing is ended.

  When the push button 31B is not operated in 177SGS331 (177SGS331; N), it is determined whether or not the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS341). When the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS341; Y), that is, when the operation of the push button 31B is completed while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating, a stop instruction is issued to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. Is output to stop the driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342), clears the accessory operating flag (177SGS343), and ends the effect auditor operating process.

  In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the combined position in the performance accessory operation process, whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, the movable state. The form in which the drive modes for driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed based on the positions where the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect member operation In the processing, the drive mode for driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is changed based on the number of times the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (for example, when the push button 31B is operated for the first time). In this case, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode, and when the push button 31B is operated for the second time or later, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. Good.

  FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect character storage process in the variable display effect effect process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the effect character storage process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character operation flag is set (177SGS351). When the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS351; Y), the drive of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R is stopped by outputting a stop instruction to the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R (177SGS370), The character product in-operation flag is cleared (177SGS371), and the effect character product storage processing ends.

  When the accessory operating flag is not set (177SGS351; N), whether the accessory storing flag indicating that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating toward the origin position is set. It is determined whether or not (177SGS352). When the accessory storage flag is not set (177SGS352; N), that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not still operating toward the origin position, the storage of the accessory (movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R) (origin). It is determined whether or not it is in the period of starting the movement toward the position) (177SGS353).

  If it is outside the period for starting character storage (177SGS353; N), the effect character storage process is ended, and if it is during the period for starting character storage (177SGS353; Y), the coalescence detection sensor 177SG402 It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (177SGS354). When the merged detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, sufficient acceleration for rotating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) when moving from the merged position to the origin position can be obtained. Based on what can be done, an operation instruction in the speed priority mode is output to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS355), and the character effect storing flag is set and the effect effect object storage processing is ended (177SGS357).

  In addition, when the merged detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF in the 177SGS354 (177SGS354; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the merged position and thus rotate when moving to the origin position (Fig. 10-12 to Fig. 10-12). (See FIG. 10-13) Based on the inability to obtain sufficient acceleration to achieve the above, an operation instruction in the torque priority mode is output to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS356), and the accessory is being stored. The flag is set and the effect character storage process is ended (177SGS357).

  When the accessory storage flag is set in 177SGS352 (177SGS352; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, to the origin position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (177SGS360). When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is completed (177SGS360; Y), the stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. The driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped (177SGS361), the accessory storage flag is cleared (177SGS362), and the effect accessory storage processing ends.

  In addition, when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF, that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have not been moved to the origin position (177SGS360; N), the processing of 177SGS361 and 177SGS362 is not executed. The article storage processing ends.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the variable display is performed with the variation pattern of super reach C, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. The movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated (moved) from the origin position to the combined position by the player continuously operating (for example, long-pressing) the push button 31B.

  When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the variation display in the variation pattern of the super reach C, the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is the initial operation (the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the origin position). (The first operation in the state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are placed at the origin position or the re-action when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are placed at the origin position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. If the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are restarted in a state where they are arranged at a position different from the origin position (non-origin position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. It has become the jar.

  That is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach C, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved away from the origin position by the movement (when the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R moves out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401), as shown in FIG. , The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B again, so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position. It said operating unable rotation in developing moving (see FIG 10-12～ diagram 10-13) is prevented from resulting in stop towards the position. In addition, when the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R do not substantially move from the origin position due to the driving of the movement motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B (the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R detect the origin). (If the sensor 177SG401 does not move out of the detection range), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are again in the speed priority mode based on the push button 31B being operated again as shown in FIG. 10-29 (B). Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven by the motor, sufficient acceleration for rotation (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) can be obtained while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position to the combined position. It has become.

  Then, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the origin position during the change display in the change pattern of the super reach C, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the operation is performed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. Without being executed, that is, the control by operating the push button 31B is disabled. Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (second position) when starting the operation, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to start the operation. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at a position (non-combined position) different from the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the player or the like once operates the push button 31B and then operates it again to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position. Although the mode for restarting is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player or the like operates the push button 31B again during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the push button is started from the timing. If the period until the end timing of the operation acceptance period of 31B is longer than the period until the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R to the combined position is completed, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are combined at the combined position based on the re-operation of the push button 31B. Do not operate toward It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated again while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are set to the speed priority mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 31B is operated again, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always driven by the movement motor. The 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control product operation processing and to reduce the data capacity required for the effect control operation operation process.

  On the other hand, in the variation display of the variation pattern of Super Reach D, the movement from the origin position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the coalescence position and from the coalescence position to the origin position are the same as the variation display of the super reach C fluctuation pattern. Although the operation toward the target can be executed, both are executed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, and the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are set to speed priority as shown in FIG. 10-28. It is designed to be driven in mode. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, in the case of the variation pattern of the super reach D, the drive mode of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R is executed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, that is, Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R do not stop during the operation, a mode in which a single speed priority mode is set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. When moving from the combined position to the combined position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the advance speed priority mode, and when the combined position is moved from the combined position to the origin position, the advance speed priority mode is Moving speed is different (for example, moving speed is fast) Rotating motor 177SG391L, it may be driven 177SG391R.

  Further, in the case of the variation pattern of the super reach D, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only the start of the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is only the super reach D. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push buttons 31B may be set to, for example, a variation pattern of normal reach, or other than the super reach D. It may be set as another super reach, for example, super reach E. As described above, when the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is set also for the variation pattern of the normal reach, which has a low expectation that the jackpot is larger than that of the super reach D, the The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the speed reach mode for normal reach in which the moving speed is different from the speed priority mode of the reach D (for example, the moving speed is slow). In addition, even when the super-reach E with a lower jackpot expectation than the super-reach D is set as the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, the speed-priority mode of the super-reach D is set. The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the speed priority mode for super reach E different in moving speed (for example, moving speed is slow). That is, as the speed priority mode, a plurality of speed priority modes having different moving speeds are also provided, and the plurality of speed priority modes are set to the positions (origin position, united position) of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the variation pattern (big hit expectation). It may be used properly according to.

  In addition, in the effect character storage process in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. Although it may be driven in the torque priority mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and when performing the effect character storage process to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be always driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, for example, in the case where an electric power interruption occurs in the process of operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moving to the origin position after the restoration of the electric interruption. It is possible to reliably move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position while preventing the vehicle from stopping without rotating (see FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13).

  Next, an example of the movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31.

  For example, at the predetermined timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern of the super reach C is started and the reach is established and the reach reaches the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 10-30 (A). Thus, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves the moving body 177SG310 by the lifting motor 177SG305 based on the operation of the push button 31B within the operation reception period, so that the effect control CPU 120 can move left and right. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) at the same time, and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating portion 177SG330B from the first protruding position to the housing position. The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30 (C), in the variation display based on the variation pattern of the super reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is temporarily released during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, it is movable. The movement of the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) is interrupted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (D), when the push button 31B is continuously operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or when the operation of the push button 31B is restarted, FIG. As shown in (D) and FIG. 10-30 (E), the peripheral walls 177SG322E, 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 abut the abutment bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B, and the moving body 177SG310 moves while maintaining the abutting state. As a result, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees around the rotation shaft 177SG311 that faces the up-down direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (E), at the second position (combined position), the left and right movable parts 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees, come into contact with each other and combine, and the rotating part 177SG330B rotates. It is stopped at the second protruding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the elevating motor 177SG305, so that the movable portion 177SG330 ascends with respect to the pedestal 177SG331 and the image display device 5 as well. The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of FIG. After that, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the decorative pattern is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 by a combination of big hits. When the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of the super reach C loss, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to immediately before the second position shown in FIG. 10-30 (E) and then returned to the first position. Then, the decorative pattern may be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 by a combination of the loss.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position (origin position) in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are laterally separated from each other, the front cover 177SG333 and the frame body cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L are shown. The first left effect part imitating the right half part of the airplane is formed by and the first right part imitating the left half part of the airplane is formed by the front cover 177SG333 of the movable body 177SG302R and the frame cover 177SG370R. A performance section is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (E) and 10-30 (F), when in the second position (combined position) where they abut or approach each other, the left movable body 177SG302L rear cover 177SG334 and the right side movable body 177SG302L By arranging the movable body 177SG302R and the rear cover 177SG334 in parallel on the left and right sides, one second effect part imitating the entire airplane is formed.

  As described above, in the first position, the front surfaces of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame body covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R constitute the first left rendering portion and the first right rendering portion, and in the second position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302L. The back surface of the 177SG302R constitutes a second effect part different from the first effect part. More specifically, the first left rendering unit and the first right rendering unit are rendering units that can specify approximately 2/3 of the aircraft body, while the second rendering unit is a rendering unit that can identify the entire aircraft body. is there.

  In other words, a part of the first left effect part and the first right effect part that are separate from each other in the left and right positions in the first position move and combine to form one second effect part. You can give a surprise. Further, since the size of the airplane that is the second effect unit is larger than the sizes of the airplane that is the first left effect unit and the first right effect unit, it is possible to give more unexpectedness.

  In addition, for example, when the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. Movable LED 177SG340B is turned on by turning on movable LED 177SG338B when performing an effect that suggests to move or when left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined as shown in FIG. 10-30 (E). You may make it perform the definite production which notifies big hit by doing. Further, as a notice effect that suggests that the super reach effect as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (F) may be performed, for example, the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are set as the first effect. It may be possible to execute a movable body effect such as reciprocating between the first position and the position before the third position.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the first position, the movable LED 177SG338F is turned on to cause the translucent lens units 177SG340F, 177SG371L and 177SG371R to emit light. Thus, the sense of unity between the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L, 177SG370R can be improved, while the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R move from the first position to the second position and the frame cover 177SG370L. , 177SG370R, when the movable LED 177SG338F is turned off, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG3 are removed. It can be and 0R is inconspicuous that they are separated.

  Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is started and the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach D is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-31 (A). It

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (B) and FIG. 10-31 (C), by moving the moving body 177SG310 by the lifting motor 177SG305 based on the progress of the reach effect of the super reach D, the left and right movements are possible. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) at the same time, and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating portion 177SG330B from the first protruding position to the housing position. The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (D), when the reach effect of the super reach D is further executed, the peripheral walls 177SG322E, 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 contact the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B, and the corresponding contact. By moving the moving body 177SG310 while maintaining the above state, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees about the rotation shaft 177SG311 which faces the up-down direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (E), at the second position (combined position), the left and right movable parts 177SG330 which are inverted by about 180 degrees each come into contact with each other to be combined, and the rotating part 177SG330B is rotated. It is stopped at the second protruding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the elevating motor 177SG305, so that the movable portion 177SG330 ascends with respect to the pedestal 177SG331 and the image display device 5 as well. The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of FIG. After that, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the decorative pattern is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 by a combination of big hits.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position) by the player's operation of the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach C. When the push button 31B is operated in a state in which the movable body effect of moving the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is located at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R are operated. By driving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a high speed and with a low biasing force by driving in the speed priority mode, when the push button 31B is operated while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin position, , Move Motor 177SG391L, movable body 177SG302L by driving the 177SG391R by the torque priority mode, by operating the 177SG302R at low speed and Takazuke force, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable body effect can be executed by the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the reach effect of the super reach C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable object effect may be executable by the operation of the operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the like) other than the push button 31B by the player.

  In addition, as the movable body effect, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position with high speed and low biasing force. While the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, that is, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R have once been moved toward the combined position and then the push button 31B has been released. When the push button 31B is operated again after being stopped by, and the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R to the combined position is restarted, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are moved to the combined position with a low speed and a high biasing force. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are first moved from the origin position to the combined position, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are restarted toward the combined position, the movable body 177SG302L is moved. , 177SG302R have different operation modes, so that the effect of the movable body effect can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (D), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position). As a result, it is possible to impart a surprising effect to the movable body effect, so that it is possible to improve the game enjoyment of the movable body effect.

  In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, as an example of the movable body effect, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R rotates in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R that are performing the movable body are deformed or emit light in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position). , May move in a direction other than the combined position, or may simply move from the origin position to the combined position.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in the second initialization process (177SGS051), when the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, it is not detected. After the time motion control is executed, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to execute the actual motion confirmation operation, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. In the case where the detection operation control is executed, the actual movement confirmation operation is executed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode, that is, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 moves the movable body 1 Since the actual operation confirmation operation is executed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode regardless of whether the detected portions of the 7SG302L and 177SG302R are detected, the processing related to the actual operation confirmation operation Can be simplified.

  Further, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach effect of the super reach C ( In the case of executing the retracting operation in the present invention), the drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the retracting operation is started, that is, the retracting operation is started. Although a mode in which the operation mode of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R is changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R at the time of performing, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modified example 177SG-1 may be used. Reach production of reach C When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position) (when executing the retracting operation in the present invention), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position). The movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position) according to the drive mode of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R when moved toward the second position) (when the advancing operation according to the present invention is executed). The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position, depending on the speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. Body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L when moving toward the origin position from 該合 body position 177SG302R, may be a different order) as the speed of 177SG302R.

  Furthermore, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach effect of the super reach C (when the retracting operation in the present invention is performed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position. Regardless of the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when the movement is performed from the (first position) to the combined position (second position) (when the advancing operation according to the present invention is performed), the movement motor 177SG391L is always required. , 177SG391R is driven in the speed priority mode (that is, when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are always moved at high speed and with low biasing force). There. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position).

  In addition, the production device 177SG300 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is provided with contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B in addition to the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the origin position (first position). When the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B are contacted at the third position while moving from the combined position (second position) or the combined position (second position) to the origin position (first position), the contact is made. By moving the guided member 177SG320 by about 180 degrees by moving to the right or left while maintaining the state, the orientation (posture) is changed from the forward (first posture) to the backward (second posture), That is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move Since the orientation is changed by reluctant rotated, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention is applicable even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

  For example, the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the jackpot probability) is constant in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state. For example, as a modified example 177SG-2, a setting means capable of setting a setting value of 1 from a plurality of setting values is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is set by the setting means. The degree of advantage for the player (for example, the jackpot probability) may be changed according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process (see FIG. 5), the CPU 103 selects the display result determination table in which the range of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the jackpot is different according to the set value that is set, It may be determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the set value can be set in this way, the CPU 103 can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on condition that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. It suffices that the state (change permitted state) be controllable.

  In this way, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change permission state on condition that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as the modified example 177SG-3, the effect control CPU 120 It suffices to execute the non-detection operation control and the like by executing the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) in the change permitted state. By doing so, since the non-detection time operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is executed in the change permitted state, the setting value changing operation is hindered. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change permission state on condition that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on in this way, as a modification 177SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 is When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, if the CPU 103 does not control the change permission state, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is executed to execute the non-detection operation control. , When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the change permission state, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is not executed and the non-detection operation control is not executed. You can By doing so, the non-detection time operation of returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is not executed in the change permitted state, so that the setting value changing operation is hindered. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting the set value in this way, as a modification 177SG-3, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 103 sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the set value. The CPU 120 for effect control performs non-detection automatic control, detection time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation by performing the second initialization process (see FIG. 10-21). It suffices to execute control.

  Further, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the detected parts of the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the player operates the push button 31B again. Exemplifies a mode in which the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode unless the target detection sensor 177SG401 is out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the player operates the push button 31B again when executing the movable body effect during the reach effect, whether the detected portions of the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Regardless of movement motor 177SG3 1L, may be allowed to drive at the always torque priority mode 177SG391R. That is, in this case, by moving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the torque priority mode, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position) at low speed and with high biasing force. Therefore, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set to be longer than the period in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the united position (second position) at a low speed and with high biasing force. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R depending on whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved toward the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not limited to this, and the movable motors 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not limited to this. Detectable part Sensor to move the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) in response to the operation of the push button 31B, the sensor detects the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R. The drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be changed depending on whether or not the detected portion is detected.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R depending on whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved toward the combined position (second position) from However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined from the origin position (first position) to the combined position of the movable bodies 177SG391L and 177SG391R. To position (2nd position) When the push button 31B is operated for the first time, the push motor 31B is operated again during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated again, the movement motor 177SG391L, The drive modes of the 177SG391R may be different.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when executing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set to the origin position (in accordance with the long press operation of the push button 31B). Although an example is shown in which the first position) is moved toward the combined position (second position), when performing the movable body effect, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit and the stick controller 31A is moved in a plurality of directions. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position) according to an operation (so-called rega gacha) or the like. It should be noted that when the movable body effect is executed in this manner, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position) in response to continuous pressing of the push button 31B, operation of the stick controller 31A in a plurality of directions, and the like. When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position), the push buttons 31B and the stick controller 31A are operated, When the push button 31B is operated again during the movable body effect period by measuring the operation period and the like, the drive modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be changed according to the number of operations and the operation period. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R depending on whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved toward the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a sensor capable of detecting the rotation angle of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R is provided. , By the sensor Movable body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L depending on whether or not the determination result is rotating in 177SG302R, moving motor 177SG391L for moving the 177SG302R, may be made different driving modes 177SG391R.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when executing the movable body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R depending on whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is moved toward the combined position (second position) from However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guided member 177SG320 may be brought closer to the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B. Can be detected And a moving motor 177SG391L, 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R in accordance with the determination result of whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B. The driving modes may be different.

  That is, in the “first situation” and the “second situation” in the present invention, the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R like the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Whether or not the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is operated, the operation period, the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R between the origin position (first position) and the combined position (second position), and the movable body 177SG302L. , 177SG302R is rotating, whether the guided member 177SG320 is close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B, and the like.

  Further, in the feature unit 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 causes the movable object 177SG302L, 177SG302R to operate when the push button 31B is operated. If the detected part is not detected, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven in the torque priority mode to direct the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode for a predetermined period during the movable body effect. That is, after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have obtained a force for reliably rotating when moving toward the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. You may do it. By doing so, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably and quickly moved to the combined position.

  Further, in the feature unit 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 causes the movable object 177SG302L, 177SG302R to operate when the push button 31B is operated. The mode in which the drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R for determining whether or not the detected part is detected and moving the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R in accordance with the result of the determination is exemplified. Is not limited to this, and when only one detected portion of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the operation of the push button 31B is received, Other possible After moving the other movable body to the origin position by driving the moving motor corresponding to the body in the torque priority mode, the movable body 177SG302L is driven by driving both moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. , 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position to the combined position. Further, by driving the moving motor corresponding to the one movable body in the speed priority mode, the one movable body is moved from the origin position toward the combined position, and at the same time, the moving motor corresponding to the other movable body is moved. The other movable body may be moved from the origin position to the combined position by driving the motor in the torque priority mode.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, two movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated in the movable body production, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the number of movable bodies operating in the movable body production may be one or three or more.

  Further, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, the form in which the movable body effect is executed during the variable display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is generated during the big hit game. It may be executed as an effect that informs that the jackpot game is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, or as an effect that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of 16 lands.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable display 177SG302L, 177SG302R completes the movement from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) during the variable display, and thus the variable display result is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the movable body effect is a chance up effect during variable display and It may be executed as an effect other than the big hit notification effect in the variable display, such as a development notification effect for notifying that the reach effect of super reach is informed.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the detected portion of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 as the moving body effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, the push button is pressed. When the operation of 31B is accepted, it is determined whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, and the movement for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is performed according to the determination result. Although the mode in which the drive modes of the driving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are made different has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG39 according to the operation period of the push button 31B. Varying the R drive mode, i.e., the movable member 177SG302L in accordance with the operation period of the push button 31B, the moving velocity toward the united position of 177SG302R may be different.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are exemplified as the two drive modes of the speed priority mode and the torque priority mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speed priority mode may be a plurality of speed priority modes of high speed, medium speed, and low speed, or the torque priority mode may be a plurality of torque priority modes of high torque, medium torque, and low torque. Of course, the plurality of speed priority modes and the plurality of torque priority modes may be appropriately used according to the situation. For example, when moving from the origin position based on the first operation of the push button 31B, the medium speed speed priority mode is set, and when the movement is from the origin position but not by the first operation of the push button 31B, The low speed speed priority mode may be set, and the high speed speed priority mode may be set when moving from the combined position. The torque priority mode is also set to the high torque torque priority mode at the start of the operation in the re-operation by the push button 31B being re-operated, and the medium torque torque priority mode is set after the movement speed reaches the first speed after the operation is started. In addition, the torque priority mode of low torque may be set after the moving speed reaches the second speed.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the first operation mode of the present invention is a mode (high-speed low-torque operation mode) in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at high speed and low torque in the speed priority mode. The second operation mode of the invention is exemplified as a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at low speed and high torque in the torque priority mode (low speed and high torque operation mode), but as an operation mode of the present invention Is not limited to these differences in speed and torque, but includes differences in the distances at which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate, differences in the moving speed change degree and change position (change pattern), and moving speeds. The difference in the ratio of the distance between the fast part and the slow part, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 It may be a rotary or differences, etc. of the presence or absence of the extension of the rotation unit 177SG330B.

  That is, when the movement distance of the movable body differs depending on the performance, that is, when the first situation and the second situation differ in performance and the movement distance of the movable body differs depending on the performance, the movement distance (production ), The operation mode may be different. For example, when the movable body moves a short distance, a low-speed drive mode is set so that the player can recognize the movement, and when the movable body moves a long distance, in order to prevent extension during the performance. Use the high-speed drive mode to enhance the effect, or conversely, use the high-speed mode when the movable body vibrates due to repeated movements of a short distance. While emphasizing that the movable body is vibrating, in order to prevent the movable body from being damaged by inertial force, the low speed mode should be set when the movable body is repeatedly operated at a distance longer than the repeated operation. Good.

  Further, even when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are stopped due to an electric power interruption or an error while moving to the combined position, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is the operation mode before the stop (for example, , The speed priority mode) may be different from the operation mode (for example, the torque priority mode).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, which is the movable body of the invention, is provided on the game board 2, but the invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the movable body may be provided in the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can touch the finger. In this case, contact between the movable body and the player is possible. From the viewpoint of protecting the player, it is preferable to provide a sensor or the like for detecting and to provide a safety function for stopping the operation of the movable body when the contact between the movable body and the player occurs. As described above, when the movable body is stopped by the safety function, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is different from the operation mode before the stop (for example, high speed mode) (for example, low mode). May be used as the mode).

  Further, as the movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3, for example, in the case of a movable body that projects upward or diagonally upward of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of the player is interrupted during the projecting operation. Therefore, even when the movable body stops, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop may be different from the operation mode before the stop.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 177SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. Is started, and one game is ended by deriving the variable display result to a display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, and the variable display result derived to the display device is displayed. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated accordingly.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 042SG)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area 042SG10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 042SG50 having a glass window 042SG50a is rotatably provided around the left side, and the game area 042SG10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 042SG50. When the glass door frame 042SG50 is closed, the game area 042SG10 can be seen through the glass window 042SG50a.

  As shown in FIG. 11-1, the game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the game board surface that is the front surface is obstructed. A nail (not shown), a guide rail 042SG2b, and the like are provided. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board in a substantially square shape in a front view, and is a board surface plate provided with obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 042SG2b on the front surface of the game board. It may be configured as.

  In addition, the winning ball device 042SG6A, the variable winning ball device 042SG6B, the special variable winning ball device 042SG7, the passage gate 042SG41, the first special symbol display device 042SG4A, the second special symbol display device 042SG4B, the normal symbol display device 042SG20 in the characteristic part 042SG. , 1st hold display 042SG25A, 2nd hold display 042SG25B, universal figure hold display 042SG25C, center decoration frame 042SG51, image display device 5 (first hold storage display area 042SG5D, second hold storage display area 042SG5U, decorative pattern) The display areas 042SG5L, 042SG5C, 042SG5R) are the winning ball device 177SG6A, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, and the passage gate 1 in the above-described characteristic portion 177SG. 7SG41, the first special symbol display device 177SG4A, the second special symbol display device 177SG4B, the normal symbol display device 177SG20, the first hold display device 177SG25A, the second hold display device 177SG25B, the ordinary figure hold display device 177SG25C, the center decorative frame 177SG51, The image display device 5 (the first reserved storage display area 177SG5D, the second reserved storage display area 177SG5U, the decorative pattern display area 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R) has the same configuration, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  A first effect device 042SG300, a second effect device 042SG400, and a third effect device 042SG500, which operate according to effects, are provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. The first effect device 042SG300 in the characteristic part 042SG is an effect device having the same configuration as the effect body 177SG300 in the characteristic part 177SG.

  The first effect device 042SG300 includes movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R, the second effect device 042SG400 includes movable body 042SG401, and the third effect device 042SG500 includes movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521, respectively. 042SG302R, 042SG401, 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521R is movable between each standby position and the effect position.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) and 11-3 (B), the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are arranged at the left and right lateral positions of the image display device 5, which are the standby positions when not in operation. During operation, it slides from the standby position to the front position of the image display device 5, which is the presentation position.

  In addition, the movable body 042SG401 is arranged above the image display device 5 which is a standby position when not in operation, and in operation, the front position of the image display device 5 and the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R which are presentation positions from the standby position. It moves (falls) due to its own weight.

  The movable body 042SG511 is arranged at a position above the image display device 5 which is a standby position when not operating (more accurately, a position between the image display device 5 and the movable body 042SG401 when not operating in front view). During operation, it moves (falls) from the standby position to the rear position of the image display device 5 which is the presentation position by its own weight. That is, the movable body 042SG511 is blocked by the image display device 5 by moving from the standby position to the effect position, and changes from a state visible to the player to a state not visible. Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, an image of a specific character is printed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG511 in the main characterizing portion 042SG. It should be noted that the movable body 042SG511 is provided so as to be movable only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) between the standby position and the effect position described above, and is not movable in other directions (for example, the horizontal direction or the front-back direction). Has become.

  Movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged at the left and right rear end positions of the image display device 5, which is a standby position when not operating, and when operating, the left and right outer side positions of the image display device 5 that are presentation positions from the standby position. Slide to. In other words, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are invisible to the player because they are blocked by the image display device 5 when not in operation, and change to a state visible to the player by moving to the effect position. To do.

  Here, second effect device 042SG400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the second effect device 042SG400 is an effect device arranged in front of the first effect device 042SG300. As shown in FIG. 11-6, the second effect device 042SG400 is a downwardly U-shaped substrate 042SG402, and movable so as to drop by its own weight from the standby position to the effect position on the front side of the substrate 042SG402 as described above. A body 042SG401 and moving means 042SG403L, 042SG403R for moving (raising) the movable body 042SG401 from the effect position to the standby position are provided.

  The moving means 042SG403L, 042SG403R are guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R which are vertically extended and whose upper and lower ends are rotatably supported on the substrate 042SG402 and a lift for rotating the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. The main components are motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R. The ascending motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are connected to each other via a gear member (not shown). When the ascending motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R are driven, the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R rotate about the shaft center. It has become. In addition, concave grooves are formed in a spiral shape on the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R.

  The guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R include arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R positioned at the left and right ends of the movable body 042SG401, and a driving body 042SG410L that is disposed below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R to move the movable body 042SG401 from the effect position to the standby position. , 042SG410R are attached so as to be able to move up and down.

  Although not particularly shown, the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R are formed with through holes having a diameter larger than the diameter of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R in the vertical direction, and the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are formed in the through holes. It has been inserted. Therefore, the movable body 042SG401 can be smoothly dropped from the standby position to the effect position along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R without being disturbed by frictional force or the like.

  The driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are members for supporting the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R of the movable body 042SG401 that has dropped to the effect position from below. Through holes having a diameter slightly larger than the diameters of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are formed in the driver bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R so as to face in the vertical direction. The inner walls of these through holes are surrounded by the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. Engagement portions that engage with the concave grooves formed on the surface are formed. Further, the back surfaces of the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are in contact with the front surface of the substrate 042SG402. Therefore, when the drive shafts 042SG410L, 042SG410R rotate when the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are driven by the lifting motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R, the engaging portions formed on the drive shafts 042SG410L, 042SG410R rotate around the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R. By moving in the groove formed in the guide shaft 042SG406L, 042SG406R, the rotation about the guide shaft 042SG406L, 042SG406R is guided in the vertical direction along the guide shaft 042SG406L, 042SG406R with the rotation being restricted by the board 042SG402. There is.

  Since the moving means 042SG403L and 042SG403R are configured as described above, the movable body 042SG401 after dropping to the effect position moves along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R by the driving of the lifting motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R. 042SG410L and 042SG410R are adapted to be conveyed from the effect position to the standby position.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), a solenoid for supporting the movable body 042SG401 at the left and right upper ends of the substrate 042SG402 from below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R to the standby position. 042SG407L and 042SG407R are provided. These solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R release the holding of the movable body 042SG401 by being excited. In other words, the movable body 042SG401 is held by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R in the standby position when it is not operating and drops from the standby position toward the presentation position by releasing the holding by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R when operating. It is like this.

  In addition, although the movable body 042SG401 which falls finally stops by the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R coming into contact with the drive bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R in the presentation position, the rubber is provided on the upper surface of the drive bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R in the characteristic portion 042SG. Buffer portions 042SG411L and 042SG411R formed of an elastic body such as a material are provided. For this reason, in the movable body 042SG401 that falls, the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R come into contact with the buffer portions 042SG411L and 042SG411R and stop, so that the impact of the fall causes the generation between the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R and the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R. The impact and the impact sound can be reduced. Next, the third effect device 042SG500 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the third effect device 042SG500 is an effect device arranged behind the first effect device 042SG300. Further, the second effect device 042SG400 includes a plate-shaped board 042SG501, a movable body 042SG511 that can be dropped by its own weight from the standby position toward the effect position on the front side of the board 042SG501, and the front surface of the board 042SG501. Movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R that are slidable between the standby position and the effect position on the side are provided. Further, the third effect device 042SG500 is a lifting motor 042SG512 for moving (elevating) the movable body 042SG511 between the standby position and the effect position, and the movable objects 042SG521L and 042SG521R between the standby position and the effect position. The slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R for sliding movement are also provided.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5, the image display device 5 is arranged on the front side of the substrate 042SG501. The image display device 5 is attached to the substrate 042SG501 via a spacer 042SG531. Therefore, between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501, a gap having a width L1 that is longer in the front-rear direction than the width (thickness) L2 in the front-rear direction of the movable body 042SG511 is formed. The movable body 042SG511 can fall into the gap (movable to the effect position). Further, since the gap is formed between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged on the back surface side of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), a protrusion 042SG511a is formed on the rear surface of the movable body 042SG511 so as to project rearward. In addition, a long hole 042SG501a that is long in the vertical direction is formed in the substrate 042SG501. The elongated hole 042SG501a is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the above-mentioned protruding portion 042SG511a is inserted from the front side. Therefore, the movable body 042SG511 can move vertically between the standby position and the effect position along the elongated hole 042SG511a.

  Further, on the right side of the long hole 042SG511a in the substrate 042SG501, a pivot shaft 042SG501b is formed so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the substrate 042SG501, an arm 042SG514 formed in a substantially bow shape is arranged. A bearing hole 042SG501b is formed at one end of the arm 042SG514, and the above-described pivot shaft 042SG501b is inserted into the bearing hole 042SG501b.

  Further, a through hole 042SG514d extending in a predetermined direction is formed at the other end of the arm 042SG514, and the above-mentioned rear end of the projecting portion 042SG511a is inserted into the through hole 042SG514d.

  Further, an engaging portion 274B is formed on the arm 042SG514 so as to project rearward. Further, on the right side of the engaging portion 042SG514b on the rear side of the board 042SG501, a disc body 042SG513 pivotally supported by a rotation shaft facing the front-rear direction of the lifting motor 042SG512 is arranged, and on the disc body 042SG513, there is a rear side. A protruding portion 042SG513c that faces toward is formed. When the movable body 042SG511 is arranged at the standby position, the projecting portion 042SG513c abuts on the engaging portion 042SG514b from the right side as shown in FIG. By preventing rotation in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 11-7 (A)), the movement (falling) of the movable body 042SG511 toward the effect position is regulated (the movable body 042SG511 is It is designed to be maintained in the standby position).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the disk body 042SG513 is rotated by the driving of the lifting / lowering motor 042SG512, the contact of the protruding portion 042SG513c with the engaging portion 042SG514b is released. The 042SG511 drops from the standby position toward the effect position, and the arm 042SG514 rotates clockwise in a front view in response to the fall of the movable body 042SG511.

  Then, after the movable body 042SG511 moves (falls) to the effect position, the disk body 042SG513 rotates by the driving of the lifting motor 042SG512, so that the protrusion 042SG513c abuts the engagement portion 042SG514b from below. Then, as the disk body 042SG513 is continuously driven by the drive of the lifting / lowering motor 042SG512, the projecting portion 042SG513c pushes up the arm 042SG514 via the engaging portion 042SG514b, so that the movable body 042SG511 moves from the rendering position to the standby position. Be lifted.

  After the movable body 042SG511 is pulled up from the effect position to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the engaging portion 042SG514b comes into contact with the protruding portion 042SG513 from the right side to move again. The body 042SG511 is maintained in the standby position.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R have a plurality of projecting portions 042SG521aL, 042SG521aR projecting rearward and countless gear teeth. The rack portions 042SG501dL and 042SG501dR extending to the left and right are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (B), a plurality of long holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R facing the left-right direction are formed below the long hole 042SG501a in the substrate 042SG501, and these long holes are formed. The above-mentioned protrusions 042SG521aL and 042SG521aR are inserted into the holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R. Therefore, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can be moved in the left-right direction between the standby position and the effect position along the elongated holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R.

  Further, sliding motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R are arranged between the image display device 5 and the substrate 042SG501. In addition, between the sliding motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and the rack parts 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR, the first gear pivotally supported by the rotating shaft of the sliding motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and the rack parts 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR mesh with each other. Are arranged, and by further meshing the first gear and the second gear, it becomes possible to slide the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R between the standby position and the effect position by driving the sliding motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R. ing.

  FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variation pattern in the characteristic unit 042SG. In the characteristic part 042SG, among the cases where the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach variation pattern”), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the outlier variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "outlier". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed. is there. In addition, in the characteristic part 042SG, only one type of the normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, four or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach .alpha. And super reach .beta.

  As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this feature unit 042SG is executed, super reach α, super reach β, which are super reach variation patterns, It is set shorter than the super reach γ. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ in this feature unit 042SG is executed, the super reach production of super reach β is executed. The variation pattern that is set is longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed, and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach γ is executed is The special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed.

  The feature section 042SG is set so that the jackpot expectation degree at which the variable display result is “big hit” becomes higher in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. That is, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (B) and 11-9 (C), in the reach effect of super reach in the present feature section 042SG, the operation of the movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521R of the third effect device 042SG500 and The interlocking effect in which the images displayed on the image display device 5 are interlocked with each other, and the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R of the first effect body 042SG300 operate (both movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are combined at the effect position) and the second effect body 042SG400. At least one of the combined effect in which the movable body 042SG401 drops and the effect is executed.

  More specifically, the interlocking effect will be described. For example, the image 042SG5a of the airplane is displayed in the image display device 5 during the variable display as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-10 (C), the image 042SG5a of the airplane is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the player as the variable display progresses. Then, the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the rear surface position of the image display device 5) at a specific timing. At this time, in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511, the display of the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 on the image display device 5 is started, and the character appears as if the movable body 042SG511 waits. The display moves from the position to the display screen of the image display device 5, and a display as if the passenger has changed to an airplane is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), the image of the character 042SG5b and the image of the airplane 042SG5a are continuously enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 so that they are close to each other toward the player. At the same time, by sliding the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R from the standby position (the rear surface position of the image display device 5) to the effect position, these movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can move both wings of the airplane as if they are displayed on the image display device 5. Produce as you compose. That is, in the interlocking effect, the movable body 042SG511 itself can be moved only in the vertical direction, while the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 comes close to the player. An operation that the movable body 042SG511 cannot take is realized. By doing so, it is possible to give the player the impression that a part of the image 042SG5a of the airplane displayed on the image display device 5 is approaching beyond the display area of the image display device 5. The interest can be improved.

  As the interlocking effect of the characteristic part 042SG, the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the rear surface position of the image display device 5) and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 is used. An example is shown in which the display of the image 042SG5b of the same character is started, that is, only the image corresponding to a part of the movable body 042SG511 is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the interlocking effect, the movable body 042SG511 may be dropped from the standby position to the effect position, and the image display device 5 may start displaying an image corresponding to the entire movable body 042SG511.

  It should be noted that the combined effect is as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) and FIG. 11-11 (B) during the variable display as the reach effect of the super reach D in the characteristic portion 117SG (see FIG. 10-31). The movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R move from the standby position toward the effect position while rotating to form an integrated airplane at the effect position. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and 11-11 (C), the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are raised at the effect position and the movable body 042SG is dropped.

  For example, the image 042SG5a of the airplane is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-10 (C), the image 042SG5a of the airplane is directed toward the player (toward the front side of the gaming machine) in accordance with the progress of the variable display. The display is made so as to be close to each other, and the specific timing movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the rear position of the image display device 5). At this time, in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511, the display of the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 on the image display device 5 is started, and the character appears as if the movable body 042SG511 waits. The display moves from the position to the display screen of the image display device 5, and a display as if the passenger has changed to an airplane is displayed.

  Regarding such interlocking effect and coalescing effect, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), only the interlocking effect is executed in the reach effect of super reach α, and only the coalescing effect is performed in the reach effect of super reach β. In the reach effect of super reach γ, both the interlocking effect and the united effect are executed.

  As described above, in the feature portion 042SG, regarding the variation pattern of super reach, the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α. Since it is set to, whether or not the continuous production and the combined production are executed has the highest jackpot expectation when both the continuous production and the combined production are executed, and the largest jackpot when only the interlocking production is executed. Expectation is low (a big hit expectation regarding whether or not continuous production and united production are executed; continuous production and united production are executed> only combined production is performed> only linked production is executed).

  In the characteristic part 042SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the combination effect of moving the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R is executed during variable display to suggest the jackpot expectation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the combined effect of operating the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R may be executed as a notification effect that notifies that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), after the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit during variable display, the display is stopped on the image display device 5. The highlighted display of the displayed jackpot pattern is displayed a plurality of times, and the character image 042SG5x displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302L is slightly moved from the standby position toward the effect position, and is temporarily stopped at the moved position (preparation position of the movable body 042SG302L).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R while displaying the highlighted display of the jackpot pattern stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 a plurality of times. The image 042SG5y is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302R is slightly moved from the standby position toward the effect position, and is temporarily stopped at the moved position (preparation position of the movable body 042SG302R).

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (D) and 11-12 (E), the image 042SG5x of the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L and the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R are displayed on the image display device 5. Both of the images 042SG5y of the character being displayed are displayed, and after moving the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R from the respective preparation positions toward the effect position, the movable body 042SG401 may be dropped.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-10, from the upper position of the image display device 5 as the standby position to the image display device 5 as the effect position. A movable body 042SG511 that is invisible to the player when moved (falls) to the back side is provided. When the movable body 042SG511 falls, it is the same as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5. The image 042SG5b of the character is displayed, and enlarged display is performed on the display screen of the image display device 5 such that the character changes to an airplane or approaches the player as if it were approaching. That is, in the characteristic part 042SG, the image display device 5 can perform the display which the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 cannot take on the movable body 042SG511 in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in the present characteristic portion 042SG, a form in which the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be suitably reduced by dropping the movable body 042SG511 to the back side of the image display device 5 is provided. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form of reducing the visibility of the movable body 042SG511, for example, a movable body 042SG511 itself or a light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the movable body 042SG511. The visibility of the movable body 042SG511 may be reduced by turning off the light emitting means. Further, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction, and the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 may be reduced by moving the movable body 042SG511 rearward.

  Further, in the characteristic part 042SG, the form in which the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 is lowered by operating the movable body 042SG511 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 is not limited to this. The movable body that operates to reduce the sex may include other movable bodies provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 other than the movable body 042SG511. That is, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided as an inoperable decoration body, and the visibility of the decoration body may be reduced by the operation of the other movable body, or the movable body 042SG511 and the other movable body may both operate. The visibility of 042SG511 may be reduced.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 042SG, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the standby position and the effect position of the movable body 042SG511 are both behind the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be reduced by moving the movable body 042SG511 to the effect position which is the rear of the image display device 5, the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 is the image. It may be in front of the display device 5.

  In addition, the present characteristic portion 042SG exemplifies a form in which the movable body 042SG511 is completely hidden by the image display device 5 (is invisible to the player) by moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect position of the movable body 042SG511 does not have to be a position completely invisible to the player. That is, in the present invention, "changing to the second specific mode in which the player is more difficult to visually recognize than the first specific mode" means that the movable body 042SG511 is completely visible to the player by moving from the standby position to the effect position. Both the disabled form and the form in which only a part of the movable body 042SG511 is invisible to the player are included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in conjunction with the movement (falling) of the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position, the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 on the image display device 5 is displayed. By displaying the image 042SG5b, the effect of moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in the interlocking effect, when the movable body 042SG511 is located at the standby position of the movable body 042SG511, that is, the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 is displayed. When the image 042SG5b is not displayed, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are maintained at the rear position of the image display device 5 which is the standby position of these movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and the image 042SG5b of the character is displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are moved to the left and right side positions of the image display device 5, which are the production positions of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, to move the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R. L, it is possible to enhance the effect of the linking representations by displaying 042SG521R image 042SG5b.

  In the characteristic part 042SG, the movable body 042SG521L, 042SG521R is moved from the standby position of the movable body 042SG521L, 042SG521R to the effect position in the interlocking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the interlocking effect, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are easily visible to the player from the second specific state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5. As long as it is a production that changes to a specific state, the production mode does not matter. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are difficult to visually recognize from the player by turning on these light emitting means according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5. The second specific state may be changed to the first specific state that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

  Further, the image display device 5 is movably provided, and at least one of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R and the image display device 5 is moved according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5, so that the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are played. The second specific state, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, may be changed to the first specific state, which is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, in the present feature portion 042SG, when the movable body 042SG302L is operated as an informing effect informing that the variable display result is a big hit during variable display, the image display device is operated. 5, the image 042SG5x of the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed, and when the movable body 042SG302R is operated, the image of the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R is displayed on the image display device 5. The image 042SG5y is displayed. Furthermore, when both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are operated, the effect of the notification effect can be enhanced by displaying both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y described above on the image display device 5. ..

  Further, as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the decorative design is highlighted on the image display device 5 for a plurality of times. Since different images (either the image 042SG5x or the image 042SG5y) are displayed when only the movable body 042SG302L is operated and when only the movable body 042SG302R is operated, it is against the control of the big hit game state. The staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the characteristic part 042SG, as the notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display, it is different between the case where only the movable body 042SG302L is operated and the case where only the movable body 042SG302R is operated. A mode in which an image is displayed on the image display device 5 and when both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are operated, both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y are displayed on the image display device 5. , The notification effect is, for example, an effect of notifying that a specific reach effect is developed in the variable display, or a notification that the jackpot game state is controlled to be a probability change state after the jackpot game state. It may be executed as an effect or the like.

  Further, as the notification effect, an example is shown in which the images 042SG5x and 042SG5y of the same mode as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302L and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302R are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the notification effect is an image that can be recognized by the player as an image corresponding to the moving movable body, the image is displayed. The mode does not matter.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, in the notification effect, the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R move to the effect position, and then the movable body 042SG401 drops in front of the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R, so that the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R. Since the player can be focused on the movable body 042SG401 while attracting the player's attention, the effect of the movable body 042SG401 can be enhanced.

  In the characteristic part 042SG, as the notification effect, the movable body 042SG302L, 042SG302R is moved to the effect position, and then the movable body 042SG401 is dropped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The drop of the body 042SG401 may be executed during the movement of the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R to the effect position, or at the timing before the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R start to move to the effect position.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 042SG, the form in which the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 to the effect position as the interlocking effect is exemplified, but the movable body 042SG511 after the drop is movable by the player during the reach effect or the like. The body 042SG511 may be returned to the standby position again at a timing when it is difficult to pay attention to the body 042SG511. Furthermore, the movable body 042SG511 after dropping may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the process in which the movable body 042SG511 returns to the standby position by turning off the light emitting means such as the LED around the movable body 042SG511.

  Further, by providing the image display device 5 so as to be vertically movable or rotatable, the process in which the movable body 042SG511 is returned to the standby position by the moved or rotated image display device 5 may be hidden from the player.

The present embodiment also includes invention 005SG shown below. That is, conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are provided with movable movable bodies. However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-194091, since the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display unit, there is a problem that the effect of the movable body production is insufficient. Therefore, when attention is paid to the problem, Invention 005SG that solves the problem is
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG300 shown in FIG. 10A of the characteristic part 005SG) is provided,
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and the movable body effect can be executed by displaying a specific image corresponding to the movable body on the display means (for example, in the characteristic part 005SG. Before the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E in the first movable body effect, and before the image display device 5 deforms into the contracted state. A portion for displaying a blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B capable of recognizing the normal mode. (See FIG. 10-15)
According to this feature, a specific image corresponding to the movable body is displayed when the movable body operates from the front of the display unit toward the display area. It is possible to enhance the effect of moving body production.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 177SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is one in which an EL display device which is a display device is movably provided and the EL display device is operated by an operation (action) of a player. However, in JP 2012-20041 A, there is a problem that the effect cannot be improved because the EL display is simply moved by the operation of the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means of Invention 177SG for solving the problem,
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
Based on the fact that the movement of the player is detected by the detection means for a predetermined period during the valid period (for example, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B), the first movable body and the second movable body are separated from each other. Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, movable object effect shown in FIG. 10-30 and FIG. 10-31 in the characteristic section 177SG) that is operated in association with the player's operation (for example, effect in the characteristic section 177SG. Control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-24),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
When the movement of the player is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first operation mode (for example, the characteristic portion). As shown in FIG. 10-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. Therefore, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated at high speed and low torque),
When the player's motion is detected by the detection means in the second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are set to the second operation mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic part 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in the state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. Driving the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R at a low speed by driving in the torque priority mode)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to improve the effect.

The present embodiment also includes invention 005SG shown below. That is, conventionally, there is one that can scroll-display the telop image on the display means. However, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-70743, there is a problem in that the effect of effect cannot be enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, Invention 38SH that solves the problem is as follows.
A predetermined state (for example, a state where a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed or a state where an error is detected. A predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( (Time saving state), high-probability low base state (latent state), high-probability high base state (probability change state), or state controlled to a specific effect mode) For example, in the effect control CPU 120, a part that controls to execute the super reach effect by executing step S172, or a part that detects an error in the game control microcomputer 100. A part of the microcomputer 100 that controls a predetermined game state, and a part of the effect control CPU 120 that controls a predetermined effect mode. And a there may be) a part that executes a predetermined effect,
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, super reach effect) (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172);
Display control means capable of displaying a related display (e.g., telop display) related to the predetermined state on the display means (e.g., a part of CPU 120 for effect control that performs the first telop effect by performing step S172); And a part for performing a second telop effect when a command indicating that an error is detected is received in S75),
The display control means,
While executing the special effect, it is possible to display the related display in a predetermined mode accompanied by a motion (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed),
In accordance with the change of the special effect mode, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to a special mode in which the operation speed is different from the predetermined mode (for example, the second stage in which characters move at high speed, the characters move at low speed). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172 so that in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing the cut-in display), the effect is controlled in the first step. 1 telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the second stage in the latter half of the super reach effect (after the cut-in display is performed), and the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in the third stage immediately before fluctuation stop. Perform (see FIG. 8-1 of the characteristic part 38SG))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a staging effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the characteristic part 115SH (FIGS. 8-1 to 8-4), the characteristic part 005SG (FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4), the characteristic part 177SG (FIGS. 10-1 to 10-). 31) and the characteristic part 042SG (FIGS. 11-1 to 11-12) are illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be implemented for a plurality of characteristic parts among these characteristic parts.

  In the case of implementing a plurality of characteristic portions in the pachinko gaming machine 1, at least one movable body among the movable bodies operating in each characteristic portion may be used in common, or in each characteristic portion. Individual movable bodies may be used.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing,
A first movable body operably provided;
A second movable body operably provided at a position different from the first movable body;
Display means,
Equipped with
The display means is
It is possible to display the first character and the second character,
Displaying the first character when the first movable body is operated,
Displaying the second character when the second movable body is operated,
A gaming machine, wherein the first character and the second character are displayed when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated.

Images